*** empty log message ***
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@ifset I960
368@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
369@kindex -A @var{arch}
370@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
371@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
373In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
375@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 377archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
378family}, for details.
379
ff5dcc92 380Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
381other architecture families.
382@end ifset
383
384@ifclear SingleFormat
385@cindex binary input format
386@kindex -b @var{format}
387@kindex --format=@var{format}
388@cindex input format
389@cindex input format
390@item -b @var{input-format}
391@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
392@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 394@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 395that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 396configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 397to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
398default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402@xref{BFD}.
403
404You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406linking object files of different formats), by including
407@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 408particular format.
252b5132
RH
409
410The default format is taken from the environment variable
411@code{GNUTARGET}.
412@ifset UsesEnvVars
413@xref{Environment}.
414@end ifset
415You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
416@code{TARGET};
417@ifclear man
418see @ref{Format Commands}.
419@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
420@end ifclear
421
422@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424@cindex compatibility, MRI
425@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 427For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 428files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
429@ifclear man
430@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431@end ifclear
432@ifset man
433the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434@end ifset
435Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 436the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
437scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
439specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441@cindex common allocation
442@kindex -d
443@kindex -dc
444@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 445@item -d
252b5132
RH
446@itemx -dc
447@itemx -dp
448These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454@cindex entry point, from command line
455@kindex -e @var{entry}
456@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 457@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
458@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
b58f81ae
DJ
467@kindex --exclude-libs
468@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 470exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
471@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476be treated as hidden.
477
e1c37eb5
DK
478@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489regardless of this option.
490
252b5132
RH
491@cindex dynamic symbol table
492@kindex -E
493@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 494@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
495@item -E
496@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
497@itemx --no-export-dynamic
498When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
499option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
500all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
501set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
502
503If you do not use either of these options (or use the
504@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
505dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
506referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
507
508If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
509back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
510dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
511linking the program itself.
512
55255dae 513You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 514be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 515See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 516
8b747e1a
DK
517Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
518support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
519the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
520
36f63dca 521@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
522@cindex big-endian objects
523@cindex endianness
524@kindex -EB
525@item -EB
526Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
527
528@cindex little-endian objects
529@kindex -EL
530@item -EL
531Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 532@end ifclear
252b5132 533
2509a395
SL
534@kindex -f @var{name}
535@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
536@item -f @var{name}
537@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
538When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
539to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
540table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
541symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
542
543If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
544run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
545the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
546first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
547@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
548in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
549Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
550implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
551machine specific performance.
552
553This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
554will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -F @var{name}
557@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 558@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 559@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
561the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
562of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
563on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
567dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
568filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
569found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
570used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
571@var{name}.
572
ff5dcc92 573Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 574toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
575object files.
576@ifclear SingleFormat
577The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 578@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 579@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
580environment variable.
581@end ifclear
582The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
583creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 584
3dbf70a2 585@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
586@kindex -fini=@var{name}
587@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
588When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
589executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
590address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
591the function to call.
592
252b5132
RH
593@kindex -g
594@item -g
595Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
596
2509a395
SL
597@kindex -G @var{value}
598@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 599@cindex object size
2509a395 600@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
601@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
602Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
603@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
604MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
605sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
606
607@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 608@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 609@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 610@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
611@itemx -soname=@var{name}
612When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
613the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
614which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
615linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
616field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
617
618@kindex -i
619@cindex incremental link
620@item -i
621Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
622
3dbf70a2 623@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
624@kindex -init=@var{name}
625@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
626When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
627executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
628of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
629function to call.
630
252b5132 631@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 632@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 633@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 634@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
635@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
636Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
637list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
638If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
639will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
640will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 641
ff5dcc92 642On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
643files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
644and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
645called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
646@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
647indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
648to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
649@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
650
651The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
652specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
653was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
654command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
655archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
656the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
657
ff5dcc92 658See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
659archives multiple times.
660
661You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
662
663@ifset GENERIC
664This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 665if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
666behaviour of the AIX linker.
667@end ifset
668
669@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 670@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 671@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 672@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 673@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
674Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
675for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
676option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
677in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
678on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 679@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
680order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
681how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
682option is specified.
252b5132 683
9c8ebd6a
DJ
684If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
685by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
686
252b5132
RH
687@ifset UsesEnvVars
688The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 689@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
690some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
691@end ifset
692
693The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
694@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
695at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
696
697@cindex emulation
698@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 699@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
700Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
701emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
702
703If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
704@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
705
706Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
707configured.
708
709@cindex link map
710@kindex -M
711@kindex --print-map
712@item -M
713@itemx --print-map
714Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
715information about the link, including the following:
716
717@itemize @bullet
718@item
3b83e13a 719Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
720@item
721How common symbols are allocated.
722@item
723All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
724which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
725@item
726The values assigned to symbols.
727
728Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
729involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
730have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
731linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
732of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
733the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
734linker script containing:
735
736@smallexample
737 foo = 1
738 foo = foo * 4
739 foo = foo + 8
740@end smallexample
741
742will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
743option is used:
744
745@smallexample
746 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
747 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
748 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
749@end smallexample
750
751See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
752scripts.
252b5132
RH
753@end itemize
754
755@kindex -n
756@cindex read-only text
757@cindex NMAGIC
758@kindex --nmagic
759@item -n
760@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 761Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 762@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
763
764@kindex -N
765@kindex --omagic
766@cindex read/write from cmd line
767@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 768@item -N
252b5132
RH
769@itemx --omagic
770Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
771not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
772libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
773mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
774is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
775specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
776
777@kindex --no-omagic
778@cindex OMAGIC
779@item --no-omagic
780This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
781sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
782be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
783shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
784
785@kindex -o @var{output}
786@kindex --output=@var{output}
787@cindex naming the output file
788@item -o @var{output}
789@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 790Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
791option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
792script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
793
794@kindex -O @var{level}
795@cindex generating optimized output
796@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 797If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 798the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
799should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
800option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
801the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
802no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
803of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 804
a712da20
NC
805@kindex -q
806@kindex --emit-relocs
807@cindex retain relocations in final executable
808@item -q
809@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 810Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
811Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
812order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
813in larger executables.
814
dbab7a7b
NC
815This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
816
4f471f39
RS
817@kindex --force-dynamic
818@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
819@item --force-dynamic
820Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
821to VxWorks targets.
822
252b5132
RH
823@cindex partial link
824@cindex relocatable output
825@kindex -r
1049f94e 826@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 827@item -r
1049f94e 828@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 829Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 830turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
831linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
832magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
833@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 834@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
835If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
836linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
837constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
838
62bf86b4
HPN
839When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
840partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
841relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
842example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
843with input files in other formats at all.
844
252b5132
RH
845This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
846
847@kindex -R @var{file}
848@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
849@cindex symbol-only input
850@item -R @var{filename}
851@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
852Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
853relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
854to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
855programs. You may use this option more than once.
856
ff5dcc92 857For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 858followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 859the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
860
861@kindex -s
862@kindex --strip-all
863@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 864@item -s
252b5132
RH
865@itemx --strip-all
866Omit all symbol information from the output file.
867
868@kindex -S
869@kindex --strip-debug
870@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 871@item -S
252b5132
RH
872@itemx --strip-debug
873Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
874
875@kindex -t
876@kindex --trace
877@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 878@item -t
252b5132 879@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 880Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
881
882@kindex -T @var{script}
883@kindex --script=@var{script}
884@cindex script files
885@item -T @var{scriptfile}
886@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
887Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 888@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 889@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
890output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
891the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
892specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
893options accumulate.
252b5132 894
14be8564
L
895@kindex -dT @var{script}
896@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
897@cindex script files
898@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
899@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
900Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
901
902This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
903processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
904command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
905@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
906behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
907command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
908the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
909@samp{gcc}).
910
252b5132
RH
911@kindex -u @var{symbol}
912@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
913@cindex undefined symbol
914@item -u @var{symbol}
915@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
916Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
917symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
918modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
919different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
920option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
921
922@kindex -Ur
923@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 924@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
925For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
926@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 927turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
928@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
929It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
930with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
931be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
932@samp{-r} for the others.
933
577a0623
AM
934@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
935@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
936Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
937@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
938missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
939specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
940multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
941input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
942in a linker script.
a854a4a7 943
252b5132
RH
944@kindex -v
945@kindex -V
946@kindex --version
947@cindex version
948@item -v
949@itemx --version
950@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 951Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
952lists the supported emulations.
953
954@kindex -x
955@kindex --discard-all
956@cindex deleting local symbols
957@item -x
958@itemx --discard-all
959Delete all local symbols.
960
961@kindex -X
962@kindex --discard-locals
963@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 964@item -X
252b5132 965@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
966Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
967system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
968or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
969
970@kindex -y @var{symbol}
971@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
972@cindex symbol tracing
973@item -y @var{symbol}
974@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
975Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
976option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
977to prepend an underscore.
978
979This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
980don't know where the reference is coming from.
981
982@kindex -Y @var{path}
983@item -Y @var{path}
984Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
985for Solaris compatibility.
986
987@kindex -z @var{keyword}
988@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
989The recognized keywords are:
990@table @samp
991
992@item combreloc
993Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
994lookup caching possible.
995
996@item defs
560e09e9 997Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 998shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 999
6aa29e7b
JJ
1000@item execstack
1001Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1002
cd6d6c15
NC
1003@item initfirst
1004This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1005It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1006before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1007the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1008the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1009objects.
1010
1011@item interpose
1012Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1013but the primary executable.
1014
5fa222e4
AM
1015@item lazy
1016When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1017dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1018the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1019Lazy binding is the default.
1020
cd6d6c15
NC
1021@item loadfltr
1022Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1023runtime.
1024
1025@item muldefs
1026Allows multiple definitions.
1027
1028@item nocombreloc
1029Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1030
1031@item nocopyreloc
1032Disables production of copy relocs.
1033
1034@item nodefaultlib
1035Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1036ignore any default library search paths.
1037
1038@item nodelete
1039Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1040
1041@item nodlopen
1042Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1043
1044@item nodump
1045Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1046
6aa29e7b
JJ
1047@item noexecstack
1048Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1049
1050@item norelro
1051Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1052
cd6d6c15
NC
1053@item now
1054When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1055dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1056when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1057deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1058first called.
1059
1060@item origin
1061Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1062
6aa29e7b
JJ
1063@item relro
1064Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1065
24718e3b
L
1066@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1067Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1068
1069@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1070Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1071
cd6d6c15
NC
1072@end table
1073
ece2d90e 1074Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1075
1076@kindex -(
1077@cindex groups of archives
1078@item -( @var{archives} -)
1079@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1080The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1081either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1082
1083The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1084references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1085the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1086archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1087object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1088would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1089they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1090resolved.
1091
1092Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1093it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1094more archives.
1095
69da35b5
NC
1096@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1097@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1098@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1099@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1100Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1101recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1102and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1103the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1104behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1105so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1106restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1107
4a43e768
AM
1108@kindex --as-needed
1109@kindex --no-as-needed
1110@item --as-needed
1111@itemx --no-as-needed
1112This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1113on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1114the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1115on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1116needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1117for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1118which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1119the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1120linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1121@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1122
e56f61be
L
1123@kindex --add-needed
1124@kindex --no-add-needed
1125@item --add-needed
1126@itemx --no-add-needed
1127This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1128DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1129the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1130a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1131@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1132for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1133the default behaviour.
1134
252b5132
RH
1135@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1136@item -assert @var{keyword}
1137This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1138
1139@kindex -Bdynamic
1140@kindex -dy
1141@kindex -call_shared
1142@item -Bdynamic
1143@itemx -dy
1144@itemx -call_shared
1145Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1146for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1147default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1148for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1149multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1150@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1151
a1ab1d2a
UD
1152@kindex -Bgroup
1153@item -Bgroup
1154Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1155section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1156object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1157@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1158only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1159
252b5132
RH
1160@kindex -Bstatic
1161@kindex -dn
1162@kindex -non_shared
1163@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1164@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1165@itemx -dn
1166@itemx -non_shared
1167@itemx -static
1168Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1169platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1170variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1171may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1172library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1173option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1174option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1175shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1176references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1177libraries.
252b5132
RH
1178
1179@kindex -Bsymbolic
1180@item -Bsymbolic
1181When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1182definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1183for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1184within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1185platforms which support shared libraries.
1186
40b36307
L
1187@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1188@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1189When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1190symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1191This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1192libraries.
1193
55255dae
L
1194@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1195@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1196Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1197typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1198global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1199within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1200to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1201in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1202which support shared libraries.
1203
1204The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1205scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1206
40b36307
L
1207@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1208@item --dynamic-list-data
1209Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1210
1211@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1212@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1213Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1214is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1215
0b8a70d9
L
1216@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1217@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1218Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1219
252b5132
RH
1220@kindex --check-sections
1221@kindex --no-check-sections
1222@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1223@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1224Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1225been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1226perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1227suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1228allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1229restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1230Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1231force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1232option.
252b5132
RH
1233
1234@cindex cross reference table
1235@kindex --cref
1236@item --cref
1237Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1238generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1239Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1240
1241The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1242easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1243sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1244symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1245definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1246
4818e05f
AM
1247@cindex common allocation
1248@kindex --no-define-common
1249@item --no-define-common
1250This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1251The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1252@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1253
1254The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1255the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1256of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1257forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1258Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1259from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1260This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1261and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1262duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1263paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1264
252b5132 1265@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1266@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1267@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1268Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1269address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1270times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1271limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1272context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1273symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1274constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1275using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1276Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1277space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1278@var{expression}.
1279
1280@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1281@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1282@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1283@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1284@itemx --no-demangle
1285These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1286and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1287present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1288underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1289mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1290different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1291to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1292demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1293is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1294
1295@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1296@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1297@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1298@item -I@var{file}
1299@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1300Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1301generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1302linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1303doing.
1304
7ce691ae 1305@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1306@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1307@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1308@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1309Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1310with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1311
252b5132
RH
1312@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1313@item --force-exe-suffix
1314Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1315
1316If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1317@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1318the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1319option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1320Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1321it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1322
1323@kindex --gc-sections
1324@kindex --no-gc-sections
1325@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1326@item --gc-sections
1327@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1328Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1329targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1330performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1331@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1332
d5465ba2
AM
1333@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1334examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1335symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1336command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1337referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1338libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1339referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1340the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1341relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1342
ac69cbc6
TG
1343This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1344@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1345specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1346a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1347
c17d87de
NC
1348@kindex --print-gc-sections
1349@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1350@cindex garbage collection
1351@item --print-gc-sections
1352@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1353List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1354printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1355collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1356default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1357be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1358line.
1359
252b5132
RH
1360@cindex help
1361@cindex usage
1362@kindex --help
1363@item --help
1364Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1365
ea20a7da
CC
1366@kindex --target-help
1367@item --target-help
1368Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1369
2509a395
SL
1370@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1371@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1372Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1373@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1374
1375@cindex memory usage
1376@kindex --no-keep-memory
1377@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1378@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1379symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1380instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1381necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1382while linking a large executable.
1383
1384@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1385@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1386@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1387@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1388Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1389is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1390The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1391behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1392libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1393
aa713662
L
1394@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1395@kindex -z muldefs
1396@item --allow-multiple-definition
1397@itemx -z muldefs
1398Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1399report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1400first definition will be used.
1401
b79e8c78 1402@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1403@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1404@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1405@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1406Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1407This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1408determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1409shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1410how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1411
903249d7
NC
1412The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1413referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1414an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1415a shared library.
1416
1417The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1418libraries specified at link time are that:
1419
1420@itemize @bullet
1421@item
1422A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1423that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1424resolvable at load time.
1425@item
1426There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1427symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1428
1429The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1430select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1431architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1432appropriate memset function.
1433@end itemize
b79e8c78 1434
31941635
L
1435@kindex --no-undefined-version
1436@item --no-undefined-version
1437Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1438it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1439will be issued instead.
1440
3e3b46e5
PB
1441@kindex --default-symver
1442@item --default-symver
1443Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1444exported symbols.
1445
1446@kindex --default-imported-symver
1447@item --default-imported-symver
1448Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1449imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1450
252b5132
RH
1451@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1452@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1453Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1454files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1455been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1456This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1457errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1458have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1459inappropriate.
1460
fe7929ce
AM
1461@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1462@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1463Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1464library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1465
252b5132
RH
1466@kindex --no-whole-archive
1467@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1468Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1469archive files.
1470
1471@cindex output file after errors
1472@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1473@item --noinhibit-exec
1474Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1475Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1476errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1477when it issues any error whatsoever.
1478
0a9c1c8e
CD
1479@kindex -nostdlib
1480@item -nostdlib
1481Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1482command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1483(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1484
252b5132 1485@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1486@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1487@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1488@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1489file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1490@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1491object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1492object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1493should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1494usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1495name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1496list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1497command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1498this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1499@end ifclear
1500
36af4a4e
JJ
1501@kindex -pie
1502@kindex --pic-executable
1503@item -pie
1504@itemx --pic-executable
1505@cindex position independent executables
1506Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1507ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1508libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1509address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1510normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1511defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1512
252b5132
RH
1513@kindex -qmagic
1514@item -qmagic
1515This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1516
1517@kindex -Qy
1518@item -Qy
1519This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1520
1521@kindex --relax
1522@cindex synthesizing linker
1523@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1524@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1525An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1526@ifset GENERIC
1527This option is only supported on a few targets.
1528@end ifset
1529@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1530@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1531@end ifset
1532@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1533@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1534@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1535@ifset XTENSA
1536@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1537@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1538@ifset M68HC11
1539@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1540@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1541@ifset POWERPC
1542@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1543@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1544
1545On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1546optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1547in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1548instructions in the output object file.
1549
1550On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1551debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1552@ifset GENERIC
1553This is known to be
1554the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1555@end ifset
1556
1557@ifset GENERIC
1558On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1559but ignored.
1560@end ifset
1561
1562@cindex retaining specified symbols
1563@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1564@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1565@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1566@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1567Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1568discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1569symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1570@ifset GENERIC
1571(such as VxWorks)
1572@end ifset
1573where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1574run-time memory.
1575
1576@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1577or symbols needed for relocations.
1578
1579You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1580line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1581
1582@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1583@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1584@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1585@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1586Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1587linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1588arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1589them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1590also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1591objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1592@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1593ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1594@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1595
ff5dcc92 1596The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1597SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1598@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1599runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1600options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1601gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1602file systems.
252b5132 1603
ff5dcc92 1604For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1605followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1606the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1607@end ifset
1608
1609@ifset GENERIC
1610@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1611@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1612@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1613When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1614happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1615of the input files.
1616
1617When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1618non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1619shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1620explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1621specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1622@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1623either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1624appearing multiple times.
1625
28c309a2
NC
1626This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1627that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1628is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1629runtime linker would do.
1630
252b5132 1631The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1632libraries:
252b5132
RH
1633@enumerate
1634@item
ff5dcc92 1635Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1636@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1637Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1638between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1639specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1640used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1641at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1642by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1643the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1644@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1645On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1646@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1647environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1648@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1649On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1650directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1651@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1652For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1653variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1654@item
ec4eb78a
L
1655For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1656@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1657libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1658@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1659@item
252b5132
RH
1660The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1661@item
1662For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1663exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1664@end enumerate
1665
1666If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1667warning and continue with the link.
1668@end ifset
1669
1670@kindex -shared
1671@kindex -Bshareable
1672@item -shared
1673@itemx -Bshareable
1674@cindex shared libraries
1675Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1676and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1677shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1678undefined symbols in the link.
1679
252b5132 1680@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1681@item --sort-common
1682@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1683@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1684This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1685ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1686sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1687eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1688between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1689specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1690
2509a395
SL
1691@kindex --sort-section=name
1692@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1693This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1694patterns in the linker script.
1695
2509a395
SL
1696@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1697@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1698This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1699patterns in the linker script.
1700
252b5132 1701@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1702@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1703Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1704each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1705size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1706
1707@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1708@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1709Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1710output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1711This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1712certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1713cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1714that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1715support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1716input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1717more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1718many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1719
1720@kindex --stats
1721@item --stats
1722Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1723as execution time and memory usage.
1724
2509a395 1725@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1726@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1727Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1728configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1729that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1730
252b5132
RH
1731@kindex --traditional-format
1732@cindex traditional format
1733@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1734For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1735the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1736use the traditional format instead.
1737
1738@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1739For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1740symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1741full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1742@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1743trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1744combine duplicate entries.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1747@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1748Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1749address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1750times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1751line.
1752@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1753for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1754@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1755should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1756sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1757
2509a395
SL
1758@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1759@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1760@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1761@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1762@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1763@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1764@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1765Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1766@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1767
2509a395
SL
1768@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1769@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1770@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1771When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1772of the first byte of the text segment.
1773
560e09e9
NC
1774@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1775@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1776Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1777values for @samp{method}:
1778
1779@table @samp
1780@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1781Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1782
1783@item report-all
da8bce14 1784Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1785
1786@item ignore-in-object-files
1787Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1788ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1789
1790@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1791Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1792ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1793when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1794libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1795command line.
1796@end table
1797
1798The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1799by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1800
1801Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1802unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1803can change this to a warning.
1804
252b5132
RH
1805@kindex --verbose
1806@cindex verbose
1807@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1808@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1809Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1810supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1811the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1812
1813@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1814@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1815@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1816Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1817used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1818about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1819is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1820see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1821use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1822symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1823@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1824
7ce691ae 1825@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1826@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1827@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1828@item --warn-common
1829Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1830a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1831but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1832you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1833Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1834warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1835
1836There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1837
1838@table @samp
1839@item int i = 1;
1840A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1841file.
1842
1843@item extern int i;
1844An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1845There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1846variable somewhere.
1847
1848@item int i;
1849A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1850variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1851The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1852single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1853size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1854a definition of the same variable.
1855@end table
1856
1857The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1858Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1859just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1860encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1861a common symbol.
1862
1863@enumerate
1864@item
1865Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1866definition for the symbol.
1867@smallexample
1868@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1869 overridden by definition
1870@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1871@end smallexample
1872
1873@item
1874Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1875the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1876except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1877@smallexample
1878@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1879 overriding common
1880@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1881@end smallexample
1882
1883@item
1884Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1885@smallexample
1886@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1887 of `@var{symbol}'
1888@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1889@end smallexample
1890
1891@item
1892Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1893@smallexample
1894@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1895 overridden by larger common
1896@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1897@end smallexample
1898
1899@item
1900Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1901the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1902encountered in a different order.
1903@smallexample
1904@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1905 overriding smaller common
1906@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1907@end smallexample
1908@end enumerate
1909
1910@kindex --warn-constructors
1911@item --warn-constructors
1912Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1913object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1914detect the use of global constructors.
1915
1916@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1917@item --warn-multiple-gp
1918Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1919This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1920Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1921section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1922of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1923base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1924base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1925bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1926large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1927values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1928option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1929
1930@kindex --warn-once
1931@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1932@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1933@item --warn-once
1934Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1935which refers to it.
1936
1937@kindex --warn-section-align
1938@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1939@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1940@item --warn-section-align
1941Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1942alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1943The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1944is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1945the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1946
8fdd7217
NC
1947@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1948@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1949Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1950
a0c402a5
L
1951@kindex --warn-alternate-em
1952@item --warn-alternate-em
1953Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1954
560e09e9
NC
1955@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1956@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1957If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1958@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1959This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1960
1961@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1962@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1963This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1964it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1965
252b5132
RH
1966@kindex --whole-archive
1967@cindex including an entire archive
1968@item --whole-archive
1969For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1970@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1971in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1972files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1973library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1974library. This option may be used more than once.
1975
7ec229ce 1976Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1977about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1978Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1979list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1980your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1981
2509a395
SL
1982@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1983@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
1984Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1985@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1986undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1987@var{symbol}.
1988
1989This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1990wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1991wishes to call the system function, it should call
1992@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1993
1994Here is a trivial example:
1995
1996@smallexample
1997void *
cc2f008e 1998__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1999@{
cc2f008e 2000 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2001 return __real_malloc (c);
2002@}
2003@end smallexample
2004
ff5dcc92 2005If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2006all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2007instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2008call the real @code{malloc} function.
2009
2010You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2011links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2012you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2013file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2014call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2015
6aa29e7b
JJ
2016@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2017@item --eh-frame-hdr
2018Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2019@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2020
6c1439be
L
2021@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2022@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2023@item --enable-new-dtags
2024@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2025This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2026systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2027@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2028If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2029created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2030those options are only available for ELF systems.
2031
2d643429 2032@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2033@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2034Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2035close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2036time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2037increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2038value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2039
fdc90cb4
JJ
2040@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2041@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2042Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2043@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2044new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2045the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2046hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2047
35835446
JR
2048@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2049@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2050This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2051linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2052for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2053about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2054
4f9c04f7 2055Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20561021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2057run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2058has been used.
2059
2060The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2061enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2062
c0065db7
RM
2063@kindex --build-id
2064@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2065@item --build-id
2066@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2067Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2068The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2069file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2070@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2071parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2072@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2073@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2074an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2075characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2076omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2077
2078The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2079that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2080unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2081to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2082file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2083string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2084
2085Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2086@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2087@end table
2088
0285c67d
NC
2089@c man end
2090
36f63dca 2091@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2092
0285c67d
NC
2093@c man begin OPTIONS
2094
ff5dcc92 2095The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2096the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2097normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2098use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2099@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2100like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2101symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2102object file).
2103
2104In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2105support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2106PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2107values by either a space or an equals sign.
2108
ff5dcc92 2109@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2110
2111@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2112@item --add-stdcall-alias
2113If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2114as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2115[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2116
2117@kindex --base-file
2118@item --base-file @var{file}
2119Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2120addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2121@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2122[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2123
2124@kindex --dll
2125@item --dll
2126Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2127@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2128file.
bb10df36 2129[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2130
88183869
DK
2131@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2132@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2133@item --enable-long-section-names
2134@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2135The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2136the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2137for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2138fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2139to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2140allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2141disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2142generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2143as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2144with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2145GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2146information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2147option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2148section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2149when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2150image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2151[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2152
252b5132
RH
2153@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2154@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2155@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2156@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2157If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2158do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2159only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2160resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2161undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2162@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2163to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2164warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2165import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2166to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2167feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2168@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2169mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2170[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2171
2172@cindex DLLs, creating
2173@kindex --export-all-symbols
2174@item --export-all-symbols
2175If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2176be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2177otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2178explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2179attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2180option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2181@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2182@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2183exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2184re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2185such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2186@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2187@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2188Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2189not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2190extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2191(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2192These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2193@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2194@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2195@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2196@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2197[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2198
2199@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2200@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2201Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2202exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2203[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2204
2205@kindex --file-alignment
2206@item --file-alignment
2207Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2208file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2209512.
bb10df36 2210[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2211
2212@cindex heap size
2213@kindex --heap
2214@item --heap @var{reserve}
2215@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2216Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2217to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2218committed.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2220
2221@cindex image base
2222@kindex --image-base
2223@item --image-base @var{value}
2224Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2225the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2226is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2227your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2228other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2229for dlls.
bb10df36 2230[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2231
2232@kindex --kill-at
2233@item --kill-at
2234If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2235symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2236[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2237
26d2d8a2
BF
2238@kindex --large-address-aware
2239@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2240If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2241header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2242greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2243or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2244section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2245[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2246
252b5132
RH
2247@kindex --major-image-version
2248@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2249Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2250[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2251
2252@kindex --major-os-version
2253@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2254Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2255[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2256
2257@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2258@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2259Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2260[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2261
2262@kindex --minor-image-version
2263@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2264Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2265[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2266
2267@kindex --minor-os-version
2268@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2269Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2270[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2271
2272@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2273@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2274Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2275[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2276
2277@cindex DEF files, creating
2278@cindex DLLs, creating
2279@kindex --output-def
2280@item --output-def @var{file}
2281The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2282file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2283(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2284library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2285automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2286[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2287
b044cda1
CW
2288@cindex DLLs, creating
2289@kindex --out-implib
2290@item --out-implib @var{file}
2291The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2292import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2293import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2294may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2295makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2296creation step.
bb10df36 2297[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2298
2299@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2300@item --enable-auto-image-base
2301Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2302using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2303from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2304collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2305avoided.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2307
2308@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2309@item --disable-auto-image-base
2310Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2311user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2312default.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2314
2315@cindex DLLs, linking to
2316@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2317@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2318When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2319search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2320@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2321between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2322uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2323@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2324[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2325
2326@kindex --enable-auto-import
2327@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2328Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2329DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2330building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2331'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2332to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2333specification published by Microsoft.
2334
e2a83dd0
NC
2335Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2336data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2337placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2338around a problem with consts that is described here:
2339http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2340
4d8907ac
DS
2341Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2342see this message:
0d888aac 2343
ece2d90e 2344"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2345documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2346
ece2d90e
NC
2347This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2348ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2349allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2350fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2351constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2352multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2353this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2354of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2355the warning, and exit.
2356
2357There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2358data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2359
2fa9fc65
NC
2360One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2361of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2362this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2363
c0065db7
RM
2364A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2365that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2366there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2367a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2368
2369@example
2370extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2371extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2372 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2373@end example
2374
2375or
2376
2377@example
2378extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2379extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2380 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2381@end example
2382
c0065db7 2383For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2384is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2385
2386@example
2387extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2388extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2389 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2390@end example
2391
c406afaf
NC
2392or
2393
2394@example
2395extern long long extern_ll;
2396extern_ll -->
2397 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2398@end example
2399
2fa9fc65 2400A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2401'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2402@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2403requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2404building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2405merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2406between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2407constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2408
2409Original:
2410@example
2411--foo.h
2412extern int arr[];
2413--foo.c
2414#include "foo.h"
2415void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2416 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2417@}
2418@end example
2419
2420Solution 1:
2421@example
2422--foo.h
2423extern int arr[];
2424--foo.c
2425#include "foo.h"
2426void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2427 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2428 volatile int *parr = arr;
2429 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2430@}
2431@end example
2432
2433Solution 2:
2434@example
2435--foo.h
2436/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2437#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2438 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2439#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2440#else
2441#define FOO_IMPORT
2442#endif
2443extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2444--foo.c
2445#include "foo.h"
2446void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2447 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2448@}
2449@end example
2450
c0065db7 2451A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2452library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2453for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2454functions).
bb10df36 2455[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2456
2457@kindex --disable-auto-import
2458@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2459Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2460@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2461[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2462
2fa9fc65
NC
2463@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2464@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2465If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2466that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2467a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2468environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2469[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2470
2471@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2472@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2473Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2474DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2475[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2476
b044cda1
CW
2477@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2478@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2479Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2480[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2481
252b5132
RH
2482@kindex --section-alignment
2483@item --section-alignment
2484Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2485addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2486[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2487
2488@cindex stack size
2489@kindex --stack
2490@item --stack @var{reserve}
2491@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2492Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2493to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2494committed.
bb10df36 2495[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2496
2497@kindex --subsystem
2498@item --subsystem @var{which}
2499@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2500@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2501Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2502legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2503@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2504the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2505@var{which}.
bb10df36 2506[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2507
2f563b51
DK
2508The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2509of the PE file header:
2510[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2511
2512@kindex --dynamicbase
2513@item --dynamicbase
2514The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2515randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2516Vista for i386 PE targets.
2517
2518@kindex --forceinteg
2519@item --forceinteg
2520Code integrity checks are enforced.
2521
2522@kindex --nxcompat
2523@item --nxcompat
2524The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2525This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2526
2527@kindex --no-isolation
2528@item --no-isolation
2529Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2530
2531@kindex --no-seh
2532@item --no-seh
2533The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2534this image.
2535
2536@kindex --no-bind
2537@item --no-bind
2538Do not bind this image.
2539
2540@kindex --wdmdriver
2541@item --wdmdriver
2542The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2543
2544@kindex --tsaware
2545@item --tsaware
2546The image is Terminal Server aware.
2547
252b5132
RH
2548@end table
2549
0285c67d
NC
2550@c man end
2551
93fd0973
SC
2552@ifset M68HC11
2553@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2554
2555@c man begin OPTIONS
2556
2557The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2558memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2559
2560@table @gcctabopt
2561
2562@kindex --no-trampoline
2563@item --no-trampoline
2564This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2565is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2566instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2567
2568@kindex --bank-window
2569@item --bank-window @var{name}
2570This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2571the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2572The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2573paging and addresses within the memory window.
2574
2575@end table
2576
2577@c man end
2578@end ifset
2579
7fb9f789
NC
2580@ifset M68K
2581@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2582
2583@c man begin OPTIONS
2584
2585The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2586when linking for 68K targets.
2587
2588@table @gcctabopt
2589
2590@kindex --got
2591@item --got=@var{type}
2592This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2593@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2594@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2595Info entry for @file{ld}.
2596
2597@end table
2598
2599@c man end
2600@end ifset
2601
252b5132
RH
2602@ifset UsesEnvVars
2603@node Environment
2604@section Environment Variables
2605
0285c67d
NC
2606@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2607
560e09e9 2608You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2609@ifclear SingleFormat
2610@code{GNUTARGET},
2611@end ifclear
2612@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2613
36f63dca 2614@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2615@kindex GNUTARGET
2616@cindex default input format
2617@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2618use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2619of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2620@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2621of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2622attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2623this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2624there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2625object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2626BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2627in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2628@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2629
2630@kindex LDEMULATION
2631@cindex default emulation
2632@cindex emulation, default
2633@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2634@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2635behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2636available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2637the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2638variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2639linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2640
2641@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2642@cindex demangling, default
2643Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2644@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2645default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2646a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2647may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2648options.
2649
0285c67d
NC
2650@c man end
2651@end ifset
2652
252b5132
RH
2653@node Scripts
2654@chapter Linker Scripts
2655
2656@cindex scripts
2657@cindex linker scripts
2658@cindex command files
2659Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2660written in the linker command language.
2661
2662The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2663the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2664the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2665more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2666direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2667described below.
2668
2669The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2670yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2671linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2672to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2673such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2674
2675You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2676line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2677default linker script.
2678
2679You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2680to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2681Linker Scripts}.
2682
2683@menu
2684* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2685* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2686* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2687* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2688* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2689* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2690* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2691* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2692* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2693* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2694* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2695@end menu
2696
2697@node Basic Script Concepts
2698@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2699@cindex linker script concepts
2700We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2701describe the linker script language.
2702
2703The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2704file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2705@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2706The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2707purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2708among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2709section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2710in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2711
2712Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2713also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2714contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2715the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2716A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2717area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2718loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2719which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2720of debugging information.
2721
2722Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2723first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2724the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2725@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2726section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2727same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2728is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2729(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2730based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2731RAM address would be the VMA.
2732
2733You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2734program with the @samp{-h} option.
2735
2736Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2737@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2738has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2739information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2740will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2741static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2742referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2743
2744You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2745program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2746option.
2747
2748@node Script Format
2749@section Linker Script Format
2750@cindex linker script format
2751Linker scripts are text files.
2752
2753You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2754either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2755symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2756generally ignored.
2757
2758Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2759If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2760otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2761double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2762file name.
2763
2764You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2765@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2766to whitespace.
2767
2768@node Simple Example
2769@section Simple Linker Script Example
2770@cindex linker script example
2771@cindex example of linker script
2772Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2773
2774The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2775@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2776memory layout of the output file.
2777
2778The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2779describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2780code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2781@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2782Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2783your input files.
2784
2785For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27860x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2787linker script which will do that:
2788@smallexample
2789SECTIONS
2790@{
2791 . = 0x10000;
2792 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2793 . = 0x8000000;
2794 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2795 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2796@}
2797@end smallexample
2798
2799You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2800followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2801descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2802
252b5132
RH
2803The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2804sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2805counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2806other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2807current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2808incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2809@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2810
2811The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2812required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2813after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2814which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2815wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2816means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2817
2818Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2819@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2820@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2821
2822The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2823the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2824at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2825output section, the value of the location counter will be
2826@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2827effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2828immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2829
2830The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2831alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2832example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2833sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2834may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2835sections.
2836
2837That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2838
2839@node Simple Commands
2840@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2841@cindex linker script simple commands
2842In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2843
2844@menu
2845* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2846* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2847@ifclear SingleFormat
2848* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2849@end ifclear
2850
4a93e180 2851* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2852* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2853@end menu
2854
2855@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2856@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2857@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2858@cindex start of execution
2859@cindex first instruction
2860@cindex entry point
2861The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2862point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2863entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2864@smallexample
2865ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2866@end smallexample
2867
2868There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2869entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2870stopping when one of them succeeds:
2871@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2872@item
252b5132 2873the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2874@item
252b5132 2875the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2876@item
252b5132 2877the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2878@item
252b5132 2879the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2880@item
252b5132
RH
2881The address @code{0}.
2882@end itemize
2883
2884@node File Commands
36f63dca 2885@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2886@cindex linker script file commands
2887Several linker script commands deal with files.
2888
2889@table @code
2890@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2891@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2892@cindex including a linker script
2893Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2894be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2895with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
289610 levels deep.
2897
4006703d
NS
2898You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2899@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2900
252b5132
RH
2901@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2902@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2903@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2904@cindex input files in linker scripts
2905@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2906@cindex linker script input object files
2907The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2908in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2909
2910For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2911a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2912then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2913
2914In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2915script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2916
e3f2db7f
AO
2917In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2918with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2919located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2920for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2921open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2922linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2923description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2924
ff5dcc92 2925If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2926name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2927@samp{-l}.
2928
2929When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2930files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2931script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2932
2933@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2934@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2935@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2936@cindex grouping input files
2937The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2938files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2939new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2940in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2941
b717d30e
JJ
2942@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2943@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2944@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2945This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2946commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2947as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2948with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2949when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2950@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2951and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2952setting afterwards.
2953
252b5132
RH
2954@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2955@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2956@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2957The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2958@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2959@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2960Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2961precedence.
2962
2963You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2964output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2965
2966@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2967@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2968@cindex library search path in linker script
2969@cindex archive search path in linker script
2970@cindex search path in linker script
2971The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2972@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2973@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2974on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2975are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2976the command line option are searched first.
2977
2978@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2979@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2980@cindex first input file
2981The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2982that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2983though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2984when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2985first file.
2986@end table
2987
2988@ifclear SingleFormat
2989@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2990@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2991A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2992
2993@table @code
2994@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2995@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2996@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2997@cindex output file format in linker script
2998The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2999output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3000exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3001(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3002line option takes precedence.
3003
3004You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3005formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3006This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3007desired endianness.
3008
3009If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3010will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3011output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3012used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3013
3014For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3015command:
3016@smallexample
3017OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3018@end smallexample
3019This says that the default format for the output file is
3020@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3021option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3022format.
3023
3024@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3025@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3026@cindex input file format in linker script
3027The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3028files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3029This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3030(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3031is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3032command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3033@end table
3034@end ifclear
3035
4a93e180
NC
3036@node REGION_ALIAS
3037@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3038@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3039@cindex region alias
3040@cindex region names
3041
3042Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3043@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3044
3045@smallexample
3046REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3047@end smallexample
3048
3049The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3050memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3051to memory regions. An example follows.
3052
3053Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3054memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3055that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3056non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3057access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3058read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3059sections:
3060
3061@itemize @bullet
3062@item
3063@code{.text} program code;
3064@item
3065@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3066@item
3067@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3068@item
3069@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3070@end itemize
3071
3072The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3073part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3074output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3075systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3076@code{C}:
3077@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3078@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3079@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3080@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3081@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3082@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3083@end multitable
3084The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3085loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3086the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3087the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3088
3089The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3090includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3091memory layout:
3092@smallexample
3093INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3094
3095SECTIONS
3096 @{
3097 .text :
3098 @{
3099 *(.text)
3100 @} > REGION_TEXT
3101 .rodata :
3102 @{
3103 *(.rodata)
3104 rodata_end = .;
3105 @} > REGION_RODATA
3106 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3107 @{
3108 data_start = .;
3109 *(.data)
3110 @} > REGION_DATA
3111 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3112 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3113 .bss :
3114 @{
3115 *(.bss)
3116 @} > REGION_BSS
3117 @}
3118@end smallexample
3119
3120Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3121regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3122variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3123@table @code
3124@item A
3125Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3126@smallexample
3127MEMORY
3128 @{
3129 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3130 @}
3131
3132REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3133REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3134REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3135REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3136@end smallexample
3137@item B
3138Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3139into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3140@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3141@smallexample
3142MEMORY
3143 @{
3144 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3145 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3146 @}
3147
3148REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3149REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3150REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3151REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3152@end smallexample
3153@item C
3154Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3155@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3156initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3157system start into the @code{RAM}.
3158@smallexample
3159MEMORY
3160 @{
3161 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3162 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3163 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3164 @}
3165
3166REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3167REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3168REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3169REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3170@end smallexample
3171@end table
3172
3173It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3174@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3175necessary:
3176@smallexample
3177#include <string.h>
3178
3179extern char data_start [];
3180extern char data_size [];
3181extern char data_load_start [];
3182
3183void copy_data(void)
3184@{
3185 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3186 @{
3187 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3188 @}
3189@}
3190@end smallexample
3191
252b5132 3192@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3193@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3194There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3195
3196@table @code
3197@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3198@kindex ASSERT
3199@cindex assertion in linker script
3200Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3201with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3202
3203@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3204@kindex EXTERN
3205@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3206Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3207symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3208modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3209each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3210command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3211
3212@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3213@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3214@cindex common allocation in linker script
3215This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3216to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3217output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3218
4818e05f
AM
3219@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3220@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3221@cindex common allocation in linker script
3222This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3223command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3224to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3225
53d25da6
AM
3226@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3227@kindex INSERT
3228@cindex insert user script into default script
3229This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3230augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3231inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3232@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3233default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3234sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3235linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3236insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3237linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3238default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3239of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3240to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3241is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3242
3243@smallexample
3244SECTIONS
3245@{
3246 OVERLAY :
3247 @{
3248 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3249 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3250 @}
3251@}
3252INSERT AFTER .text;
3253@end smallexample
3254
252b5132
RH
3255@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3256@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3257@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3258This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3259references among certain output sections.
3260
3261In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3262using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3263will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3264errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3265a function defined in the other section.
3266
3267The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3268@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3269an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3270@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3271names.
3272
3273@ifclear SingleFormat
3274@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3275@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3276@cindex machine architecture
3277@cindex architecture
3278Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3279of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3280architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3281the @samp{-f} option.
3282@end ifclear
3283@end table
3284
3285@node Assignments
3286@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3287@cindex assignment in scripts
3288@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3289@cindex variables, defining
3290You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3291the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3292
3293@menu
3294* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3295* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3296* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3297* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3298@end menu
3299
3300@node Simple Assignments
3301@subsection Simple Assignments
3302
3303You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3304
3305@table @code
3306@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3307@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3308@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3309@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3310@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3311@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3312@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3313@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3314@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3315@end table
3316
3317The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3318@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3319defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3320
3321The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3322may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3323
3324The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3325
3326Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3327
3328You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3329statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3330section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3331
3332The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3333expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3334
3335Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3336assignments may be used:
3337
3338@smallexample
3339floating_point = 0;
3340SECTIONS
3341@{
3342 .text :
3343 @{
3344 *(.text)
3345 _etext = .;
3346 @}
156e34dd 3347 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3348 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3349@}
3350@end smallexample
3351@noindent
3352In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3353zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3354the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3355defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3356upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3357
3358@node PROVIDE
3359@subsection PROVIDE
3360@cindex PROVIDE
3361In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3362only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3363the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3364@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3365@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3366@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3367@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3368@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3369
3370Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3371@smallexample
3372SECTIONS
3373@{
3374 .text :
3375 @{
3376 *(.text)
3377 _etext = .;
3378 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3379 @}
3380@}
3381@end smallexample
3382
3383In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3384underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3385the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3386underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3387If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3388linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3389
7af8e998
L
3390@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3391@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3392@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3393Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3394hidden and won't be exported.
3395
73ae6183
NC
3396@node Source Code Reference
3397@subsection Source Code Reference
3398
3399Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3400intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3401a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3402symbol that does not have a value.
3403
3404Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3405transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3406stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3407prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3408mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3409of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3410variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3411linker script variable might be referred to as:
3412
3413@smallexample
3414 extern int foo;
3415@end smallexample
3416
3417But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3418
3419@smallexample
3420 _foo = 1000;
3421@end smallexample
3422
3423In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3424transformation has taken place.
3425
3426When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3427things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3428in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3429second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3430table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3431contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3432value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3433
3434@smallexample
3435 int foo = 1000;
3436@end smallexample
3437
3438creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3439holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3440number 1000 is initially stored.
3441
3442When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3443first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3444memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3445So:
3446
3447@smallexample
3448 foo = 1;
3449@end smallexample
3450
3451looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3452associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3453address. Whereas:
3454
3455@smallexample
3456 int * a = & foo;
3457@end smallexample
3458
3459looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3460and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3461the variable @samp{a}.
3462
3463Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3464the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3465an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3466
3467@smallexample
3468 foo = 1000;
3469@end smallexample
3470
3471creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3472the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3473address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3474linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3475access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3476
3477Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3478you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3479use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3480section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3481linker script contains these declarations:
3482
3483@smallexample
3484@group
3485 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3486 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3487 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3488@end group
3489@end smallexample
3490
3491Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3492
3493@smallexample
3494@group
3495 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3496
73ae6183
NC
3497 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3498@end group
3499@end smallexample
3500
3501Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3502
252b5132 3503@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3504@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3505@kindex SECTIONS
3506The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3507into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3508
3509The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3510@smallexample
3511SECTIONS
3512@{
3513 @var{sections-command}
3514 @var{sections-command}
3515 @dots{}
3516@}
3517@end smallexample
3518
3519Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3520
3521@itemize @bullet
3522@item
3523an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3524@item
3525a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3526@item
3527an output section description
3528@item
3529an overlay description
3530@end itemize
3531
3532The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3533@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3534those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3535understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3536the layout of the output file.
3537
3538Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3539below.
3540
3541If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3542linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3543section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3544input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3545example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3546in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3547
3548@menu
3549* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3550* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3551* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3552* Input Section:: Input section description
3553* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3554* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3555* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3556* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3557* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3558@end menu
3559
3560@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3561@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3562The full description of an output section looks like this:
3563@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3564@group
7e7d5768 3565@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3566 [AT(@var{lma})]
3567 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3568 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3569 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3570 @{
3571 @var{output-section-command}
3572 @var{output-section-command}
3573 @dots{}
562d3460 3574 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3575@end group
3576@end smallexample
3577
3578Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3579
3580The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3581name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3582The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3583
3584Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3585
3586@itemize @bullet
3587@item
3588a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3589@item
3590an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3591@item
3592data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3593@item
3594a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3595@end itemize
3596
3597@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3598@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3599@cindex name, section
3600@cindex section name
3601The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3602meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3603support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3604must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3605example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3606output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3607names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3608quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3609characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3610commas must be quoted.
3611
3612The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3613Discarding}.
3614
3615@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3616@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3617@cindex address, section
3618@cindex section address
3619The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3620address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3621the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3622based on the current value of the location counter.
3623
3624If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3625set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3626@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3627current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3628requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3629output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3630within the output section.
3631
3632For example,
3633@smallexample
3634.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3635@end smallexample
3636@noindent
3637and
3638@smallexample
3639.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3640@end smallexample
3641@noindent
3642are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3643@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3644counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3645counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3646section.
3647
3648The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3649For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3650so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3651do something like this:
3652@smallexample
3653.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3654@end smallexample
3655@noindent
3656This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3657aligned upward to the specified value.
3658
3659Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3660location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3661sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3662
3663@node Input Section
36f63dca 3664@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3665@cindex input sections
3666@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3667The most common output section command is an input section description.
3668
3669The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3670You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3671in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3672map the input files into your memory layout.
3673
3674@menu
3675* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3676* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3677* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3678* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3679* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3680@end menu
3681
3682@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3683@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3684@cindex input section basics
3685An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3686by a list of section names in parentheses.
3687
3688The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3689describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3690
3691The most common input section description is to include all input
3692sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3693include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3694@smallexample
3695*(.text)
3696@end smallexample
3697@noindent
18625d54
CM
3698Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3699of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3700match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3701example:
252b5132 3702@smallexample
b4346c09 3703*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3704@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3705will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3706@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3707
3708There are two ways to include more than one section:
3709@smallexample
3710*(.text .rdata)
3711*(.text) *(.rdata)
3712@end smallexample
3713@noindent
3714The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3715@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3716first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3717they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3718@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3719@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3720
3721You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3722You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3723needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3724@smallexample
3725data.o(.data)
3726@end smallexample
3727
967928e9
AM
3728You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3729matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3730with no whitespace around the colon.
3731
3732@table @samp
3733@item archive:file
3734matches file within archive
3735@item archive:
3736matches the whole archive
3737@item :file
3738matches file but not one in an archive
3739@end table
3740
3741Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3742wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3743single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3744@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3745within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3746also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3747other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3748from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3749command.
3750
252b5132
RH
3751If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3752the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3753commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3754@smallexample
3755data.o
3756@end smallexample
3757
967928e9
AM
3758When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3759and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3760characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3761name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3762did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3763though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3764@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3765the archive search path.
3766
3767@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3768@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3769@cindex input section wildcards
3770@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3771@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3772@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3773In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3774name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3775
3776The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3777pattern for the file name.
3778
3779The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3780
3781@table @samp
3782@item *
3783matches any number of characters
3784@item ?
3785matches any single character
3786@item [@var{chars}]
3787matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3788character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3789@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3790@item \
3791quotes the following character
3792@end table
3793
3794When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3795will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3796Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3797exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3798@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3799a @samp{/} character.
3800
3801File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3802specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3803does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3804
3805If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3806appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3807will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3808sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3809@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3810@smallexample
3811.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3812.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3813@end smallexample
3814
bcaa7b3e 3815@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3816Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3817in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3818this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3819pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3820@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3821into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3822
bcaa7b3e
L
3823@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3824@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3825difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3826ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3827
3828@cindex SORT
3829@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3830
3831When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3832can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3833
3834@enumerate
3835@item
3836@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3837It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3838sections have the same name.
3839@item
3840@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3841It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3842sections have the same alignment.
3843@item
c0065db7 3844@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3845treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3846@item
3847@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3848is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3849@item
3850All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3851@end enumerate
3852
3853When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3854section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3855takes precedence over the command line option.
3856
3857If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3858command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3859treated as nested sorting command.
3860
3861@enumerate
3862@item
3863@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3864@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3865@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3866@item
3867@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3868@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3869@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3870@end enumerate
3871
3872If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3873command line option will be ignored.
3874
252b5132
RH
3875If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3876@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3877precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3878
3879This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3880files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3881sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3882The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3883with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3884linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3885@smallexample
3886@group
3887SECTIONS @{
3888 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3889 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3890 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3891 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3892@}
3893@end group
3894@end smallexample
3895
3896@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3897@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3898@cindex common symbol placement
3899@cindex uninitialized data placement
3900A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3901file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3902linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3903named @samp{COMMON}.
3904
3905You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3906other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3907particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3908input files are placed in another section.
3909
3910In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3911@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3912@smallexample
3913.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3914@end smallexample
3915
3916@cindex scommon section
3917@cindex small common symbols
3918Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3919example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3920symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3921different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3922the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3923symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3924to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3925locations.
3926
3927@cindex [COMMON]
3928You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3929notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3930@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3931
3932@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3933@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3934@cindex KEEP
3935@cindex garbage collection
3936When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3937it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3938This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3939with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3940@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3941
3942@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3943@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3944The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3945to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3946start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3947@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3948follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3949@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3950@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3951All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3952files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3953
3954@smallexample
3955@group
3956SECTIONS @{
3957 outputa 0x10000 :
3958 @{
3959 all.o
3960 foo.o (.input1)
3961 @}
36f63dca
NC
3962@end group
3963@group
252b5132
RH
3964 outputb :
3965 @{
3966 foo.o (.input2)
3967 foo1.o (.input1)
3968 @}
36f63dca
NC
3969@end group
3970@group
252b5132
RH
3971 outputc :
3972 @{
3973 *(.input1)
3974 *(.input2)
3975 @}
3976@}
3977@end group
a1ab1d2a 3978@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3979
3980@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3981@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3982@cindex data
3983@cindex section data
3984@cindex output section data
3985@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3986@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3987@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3988@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3989@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3990You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3991@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3992an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3993parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3994value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3995counter.
3996
3997The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3998store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3999bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4000stored.
4001
4002For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4003of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4004@smallexample
4005BYTE(1)
4006LONG(addr)
4007@end smallexample
4008
4009When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4010same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4011target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4012@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4013@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4014
4015If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4016which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4017When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4018true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4019endianness of the first input object file.
4020
36f63dca 4021Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4022between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4023@smallexample
4024SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4025@end smallexample
4026whereas this will work:
4027@smallexample
4028SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4029@end smallexample
4030
252b5132
RH
4031@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4032@cindex holes, filling
4033@cindex unspecified memory
4034You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4035current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4036otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4037gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4038with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4039necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4040point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4041than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4042different parts of an output section.
4043
4044This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4045value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4046@smallexample
563e308f 4047FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4048@end smallexample
4049
4050The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4051section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4052part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4053entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4054precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4055expression.
252b5132
RH
4056
4057@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4058@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4059There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4060commands.
4061
4062@table @code
4063@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4064@cindex input filename symbols
4065@cindex filename symbols
4066@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4067The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4068The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4069file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4070the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4071
4072This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4073normally used for any other object file format.
4074
4075@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4076@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4077@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4078@item CONSTRUCTORS
4079When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4080unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4081destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4082arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4083automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4084For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4085linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4086@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4087ignored for other object file formats.
4088
4089The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4090constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4091Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4092the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4093first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4094of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4095compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4096formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4097@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4098the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4099destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4100@code{exit}.
4101
4102For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4103arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4104addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4105and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4106linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4107runtime code expects to see.
4108
4109@smallexample
4110 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4111 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4112 *(.ctors)
4113 LONG(0)
4114 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4115 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4116 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4117 *(.dtors)
4118 LONG(0)
4119 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4120@end smallexample
4121
4122If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4123which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4124are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4125are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4126command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4127@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4128@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4129@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4130
4131Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4132and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4133need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4134scripts.
4135
4136@end table
4137
4138@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4139@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4140@cindex discarding sections
4141@cindex sections, discarding
4142@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4143The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4144for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4145be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4146@smallexample
49c13adb 4147.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4148@end smallexample
4149@noindent
4150will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4151@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4152sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4153space in an output section will also create the output section.
4154
a0976ea4 4155The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4156on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4157symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4158the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4159section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4160
4161@cindex /DISCARD/
4162The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4163input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4164section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4165
4166@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4167@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4168@cindex output section attributes
4169We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4170like this:
0c71d759 4171
252b5132 4172@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4173@group
7e7d5768 4174@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4175 [AT(@var{lma})]
4176 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4177 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4178 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4179 @{
4180 @var{output-section-command}
4181 @var{output-section-command}
4182 @dots{}
562d3460 4183 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4184@end group
4185@end smallexample
0c71d759 4186
252b5132
RH
4187We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4188@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4189remaining section attributes.
4190
a1ab1d2a 4191@menu
252b5132
RH
4192* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4193* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4194* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4195* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4196* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4197* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4198* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4199* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4200@end menu
4201
4202@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4203@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4204Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4205parentheses. The following types are defined:
4206
4207@table @code
4208@item NOLOAD
4209The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4210loaded into memory when the program is run.
4211@item DSECT
4212@itemx COPY
4213@itemx INFO
4214@itemx OVERLAY
4215These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4216rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4217marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4218section when the program is run.
4219@end table
4220
4221@kindex NOLOAD
4222@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4223@cindex loading, preventing
4224The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4225the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4226the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4227@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4228need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4229@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4230@smallexample
4231@group
4232SECTIONS @{
4233 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4234 @dots{}
4235@}
4236@end group
4237@end smallexample
4238
4239@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4240@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4241@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4242@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4243@cindex load address
4244@cindex section load address
4245Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4246@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4247an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4248Address}).
4249
dc0b6aa0
AM
4250The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4251the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4252
4253Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4254specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4255Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4256linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4257
4258If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4259section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4260VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4261section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4262or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4263to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4264@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4265
4266@cindex ROM initialized data
4267@cindex initialized data in ROM
4268This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4269example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4270called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4271@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4272even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4273uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4274defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4275counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4276
4277@smallexample
4278@group
4279SECTIONS
4280 @{
4281 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4282 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4283 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4284 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4285 .bss 0x3000 :
4286 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4287@}
4288@end group
4289@end smallexample
4290
4291The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4292this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4293the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4294how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4295script.
4296
4297@smallexample
4298@group
4299extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4300char *src = &_etext;
4301char *dst = &_data;
4302
4303/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4304while (dst < &_edata) @{
4305 *dst++ = *src++;
4306@}
4307
4308/* Zero bss */
4309for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4310 *dst = 0;
4311@end group
4312@end smallexample
4313
bbf115d3
L
4314@node Forced Output Alignment
4315@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4316@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4317@cindex forcing output section alignment
4318@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4319You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4320
7e7d5768
AM
4321@node Forced Input Alignment
4322@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4323@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4324@cindex forcing input section alignment
4325@cindex input section alignment
4326You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4327SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4328sections, whether larger or smaller.
4329
0c71d759
NC
4330@node Output Section Constraint
4331@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4332@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4333@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4334@cindex constraints on output sections
4335You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4336of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4337read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4338@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4339
252b5132 4340@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4341@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4342@kindex >@var{region}
4343@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4344@cindex memory regions and sections
4345You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4346using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4347
4348Here is a simple example:
4349@smallexample
4350@group
4351MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4352SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4353@end group
4354@end smallexample
4355
4356@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4357@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4358@kindex :@var{phdr}
4359@cindex section, assigning to program header
4360@cindex program headers and sections
4361You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4362using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4363one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4364assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4365@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4366linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4367
4368Here is a simple example:
4369@smallexample
4370@group
4371PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4372SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4373@end group
4374@end smallexample
4375
4376@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4377@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4378@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4379@cindex section fill pattern
4380@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4381You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4382@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4383(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4384within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4385alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4386necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4387of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4388an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4389fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4390other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4391pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4392expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4393
4394You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4395output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4396
4397Here is a simple example:
4398@smallexample
4399@group
563e308f 4400SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4401@end group
4402@end smallexample
4403
4404@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4405@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4406@kindex OVERLAY
4407@cindex overlays
4408An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4409are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4410the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4411copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4412required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4413can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4414than another.
4415
4416Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4417@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4418output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4419command is as follows:
4420@smallexample
4421@group
4422OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4423 @{
4424 @var{secname1}
4425 @{
4426 @var{output-section-command}
4427 @var{output-section-command}
4428 @dots{}
4429 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4430 @var{secname2}
4431 @{
4432 @var{output-section-command}
4433 @var{output-section-command}
4434 @dots{}
4435 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4436 @dots{}
4437 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4438@end group
4439@end smallexample
4440
4441Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4442section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4443section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4444those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4445except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4446sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4447
4448The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4449addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4450memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4451whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4452and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4453and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4454
4455If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4456among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4457all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4458section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4459NOCROSSREFS}.
4460
4461For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4462provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4463defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4464@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4465the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4466within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4467symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4468
4469At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4470the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4471
4472Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4473@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4474@smallexample
4475@group
4476 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4477 @{
4478 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4479 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4480 @}
4481@end group
4482@end smallexample
4483@noindent
4484This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4485address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4486@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4487following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4488@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4489@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4490
4491C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4492like the following.
4493
4494@smallexample
4495@group
4496 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4497 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4498 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4499@end group
4500@end smallexample
4501
4502Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4503everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4504example could have been written identically as follows.
4505
4506@smallexample
4507@group
4508 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4509 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4510 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4511 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4512 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4513 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4514 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4515@end group
4516@end smallexample
4517
4518@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4519@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4520@kindex MEMORY
4521@cindex memory regions
4522@cindex regions of memory
4523@cindex allocating memory
4524@cindex discontinuous memory
4525The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4526memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4527
4528The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4529memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4530may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4531can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4532set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4533regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4534around to fit into the available regions.
4535
4536A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4537command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4538you wish. The syntax is:
4539@smallexample
4540@group
a1ab1d2a 4541MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4542 @{
4543 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4544 @dots{}
4545 @}
4546@end group
4547@end smallexample
4548
4549The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4550region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4551Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4552with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4553must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4554add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4555command.
252b5132
RH
4556
4557@cindex memory region attributes
4558The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4559whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4560not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4561@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4562section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4563the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4564them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4565
4566The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4567@table @samp
4568@item R
4569Read-only section
4570@item W
4571Read/write section
4572@item X
4573Executable section
4574@item A
4575Allocatable section
4576@item I
4577Initialized section
4578@item L
4579Same as @samp{I}
4580@item !
4581Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4582@end table
4583
4584If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4585@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4586attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4587in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4588attributes.
4589
4590@kindex ORIGIN =
4591@kindex o =
4592@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4593The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4594the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4595cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4596abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4597@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4598
4599@kindex LENGTH =
4600@kindex len =
4601@kindex l =
4602The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4603region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4604be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4605@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4606
4607In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4608available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4609and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4610linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4611is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4612or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4613explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4614region.
4615
4616@smallexample
4617@group
a1ab1d2a 4618MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4619 @{
4620 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4621 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4622 @}
4623@end group
4624@end smallexample
4625
4626Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4627specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4628@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4629a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4630output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4631was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4632the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4633output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4634region, the linker will issue an error message.
4635
3ec57632 4636It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4637expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4638@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4639
4640@smallexample
4641@group
c0065db7 4642 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4643@end group
4644@end smallexample
4645
252b5132
RH
4646@node PHDRS
4647@section PHDRS Command
4648@kindex PHDRS
4649@cindex program headers
4650@cindex ELF program headers
4651@cindex program segments
4652@cindex segments, ELF
4653The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4654@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4655loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4656program with the @samp{-p} option.
4657
4658When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4659reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4660program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4661This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4662interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4663
4664The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4665in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4666precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4667the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4668not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4669
4670The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4671generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4672ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4673
4674This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4675@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4676
4677@smallexample
4678@group
4679PHDRS
4680@{
4681 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4682 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4683@}
4684@end group
4685@end smallexample
4686
4687The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4688of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4689header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4690with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4691must have a distinct name.
4692
4693Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4694system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4695specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4696sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4697attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4698Section Phdr}.
4699
4700It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4701merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4702repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4703contain the section.
4704
4705If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4706then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4707not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4708convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4709placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4710default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4711segment at all.
4712
4713@kindex FILEHDR
4714@kindex PHDRS
4715You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4716the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4717The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4718file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4719include the ELF program headers themselves.
4720
4721The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4722value of the keyword.
4723
4724@table @asis
4725@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4726Indicates an unused program header.
4727
4728@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4729Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4730the file.
4731
4732@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4733Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4734
4735@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4736Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4737found.
4738
4739@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4740Indicates a segment holding note information.
4741
4742@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4743A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4744ABI.
4745
4746@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4747Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4748
4749@item @var{expression}
4750An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4751be used for types not defined above.
4752@end table
4753
4754You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4755in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4756@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4757Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4758output section attribute.
4759
4760The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4761which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4762explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4763an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4764header.
4765
4766Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4767headers used on a native ELF system.
4768
4769@example
4770@group
4771PHDRS
4772@{
4773 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4774 interp PT_INTERP ;
4775 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4776 data PT_LOAD ;
4777 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4778@}
4779
4780SECTIONS
4781@{
4782 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4783 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4784 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4785 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4786 @dots{}
4787 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4788 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4789 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4790 @dots{}
4791@}
4792@end group
4793@end example
4794
4795@node VERSION
4796@section VERSION Command
4797@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4798@cindex symbol versions
4799@cindex version script
4800@cindex versions of symbols
4801The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4802only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4803symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4804a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4805shared library.
4806
4807You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4808you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4809also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4810
4811The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4812@smallexample
4813VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4814@end smallexample
4815
4816The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4817Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4818version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4819version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4820version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4821scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4822library.
4823
4824The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4825examples.
4826
4827@smallexample
4828VERS_1.1 @{
4829 global:
4830 foo1;
4831 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4832 old*;
4833 original*;
4834 new*;
252b5132
RH
4835@};
4836
4837VERS_1.2 @{
4838 foo2;
4839@} VERS_1.1;
4840
4841VERS_2.0 @{
4842 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4843 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4844 ns::*;
4845 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4846 @}
252b5132
RH
4847@} VERS_1.2;
4848@end smallexample
4849
4850This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4851version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4852The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4853a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4854of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4855symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4856is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4857in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4858However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4859name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4860
4861Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4862depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4863to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4864
4865Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4866depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4867and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4868
4869When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4870specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4871unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4872unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4873somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4874wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4875wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4876set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4877ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4878
4879The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4880they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4881could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4882However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4883
0f6bf451 4884Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4885in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4886symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4887won't.
4888
4889@smallexample
7c9c73be 4890@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4891@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4892
252b5132
RH
4893When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4894symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4895requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4896shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4897loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4898linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4899application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4900way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4901all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4902search for each symbol reference.
4903
4904The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4905doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4906that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4907functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4908the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4909required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4910that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4911versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4912the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4913
4914There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4915first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4916source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4917script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4918maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4919@smallexample
4920__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4921@end smallexample
4922@noindent
4923in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4924be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4925The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4926@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4927takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4928
4929The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4930function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4931an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4932version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4933linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4934
4935To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4936source file. Here is an example:
4937
4938@smallexample
4939__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4940__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4941__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4942__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4943@end smallexample
4944
4945In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4946unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4947example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4948@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4949
4950When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4951some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4952this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4953@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4954declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4955you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4956
4957If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4958within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4959(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4960specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4961
cb840a31
L
4962You can also specify the language in the version script:
4963
4964@smallexample
4965VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4966@end smallexample
4967
c0065db7 4968The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4969The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4970demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4971patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4972
86043bbb
MM
4973Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4974described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4975or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4976the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4977whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4978cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4979might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4980should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4981expect when you upgrade.
4982
252b5132
RH
4983@node Expressions
4984@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4985@cindex expressions
4986@cindex arithmetic
4987The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4988that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4989expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4990host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4991
4992You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4993
4994The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4995expressions.
4996
4997@menu
4998* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 4999* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5000* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5001* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5002* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5003* Operators:: Operators
5004* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5005* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5006* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5007@end menu
5008
5009@node Constants
5010@subsection Constants
5011@cindex integer notation
5012@cindex constants in linker scripts
5013All constants are integers.
5014
5015As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5016octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5017hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5018@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5019@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5020value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5021
5022@cindex scaled integers
5023@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5024@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5025@cindex suffixes for integers
5026@cindex integer suffixes
5027In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5028constant by
5029@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5030@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5031@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5032@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5033@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5034@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5035@tex
5036${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5037@end tex
5038@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5039respectively. For example, the following
5040all refer to the same quantity:
5041
252b5132 5042@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5043_fourk_1 = 4K;
5044_fourk_2 = 4096;
5045_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5046_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5047@end smallexample
5048
8a308ae8
NC
5049Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5050conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5051
0c71d759
NC
5052@node Symbolic Constants
5053@subsection Symbolic Constants
5054@cindex symbolic constants
5055@kindex CONSTANT
5056It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5057the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5058
5059@table @code
5060@item MAXPAGESIZE
5061@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5062The target's maximum page size.
5063
5064@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5065@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5066The target's default page size.
5067@end table
5068
5069So for example:
5070
5071@smallexample
5072 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5073@end smallexample
5074
5075will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5076supported by the target.
5077
252b5132
RH
5078@node Symbols
5079@subsection Symbol Names
5080@cindex symbol names
5081@cindex names
5082@cindex quoted symbol names
5083@kindex "
5084Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5085and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5086Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5087specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5088keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5089@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5090"SECTION" = 9;
5091"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5092@end smallexample
5093
5094Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5095to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5096whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5097
ecca9871
L
5098@node Orphan Sections
5099@subsection Orphan Sections
5100@cindex orphan
5101Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5102are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5103script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5104output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5105placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5106attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5107same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5108If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5109at the end of the file.
5110
5111For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5112well as section flag.
5113
41911f68 5114If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5115the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5116__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5117section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5118orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5119representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5120character.
5121
252b5132
RH
5122@node Location Counter
5123@subsection The Location Counter
5124@kindex .
5125@cindex dot
5126@cindex location counter
5127@cindex current output location
5128The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5129current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5130location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5131within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5132anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5133
5134@cindex holes
5135Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5136moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5137location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5138and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5139doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5140
5141@smallexample
5142SECTIONS
5143@{
5144 output :
5145 @{
5146 file1(.text)
5147 . = . + 1000;
5148 file2(.text)
5149 . += 1000;
5150 file3(.text)
563e308f 5151 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5152@}
5153@end smallexample
5154@noindent
5155In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5156located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5157followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5158@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5159@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5160specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5161
5c6bbab8
NC
5162@cindex dot inside sections
5163Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5164current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5165statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5166absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5167however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5168not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5169
5170@smallexample
5171SECTIONS
5172@{
5173 . = 0x100
5174 .text: @{
5175 *(.text)
5176 . = 0x200
5177 @}
5178 . = 0x500
5179 .data: @{
5180 *(.data)
5181 . += 0x600
5182 @}
5183@}
5184@end smallexample
5185
5186The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5187and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5188the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5189much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5190move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5191and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5192the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5193the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5194
b5666f2f
AM
5195@cindex dot outside sections
5196Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5197output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5198needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5199
5200@smallexample
5201SECTIONS
5202@{
5203 start_of_text = . ;
5204 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5205 end_of_text = . ;
5206
5207 start_of_data = . ;
5208 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5209 end_of_data = . ;
5210@}
5211@end smallexample
5212
5213If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5214not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5215between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5216should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5217blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5218the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5219sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5220statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5221special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5222place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5223as follows:
5224
5225@smallexample
5226SECTIONS
5227@{
5228 start_of_text = . ;
5229 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5230 end_of_text = . ;
5231
5232 start_of_data = . ;
5233 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5234 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5235 end_of_data = . ;
5236@}
5237@end smallexample
5238
5239This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5240@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5241placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5242assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5243a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5244section. So you could write:
5245
5246@smallexample
5247SECTIONS
5248@{
5249 start_of_text = . ;
5250 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5251 end_of_text = . ;
5252
5253 . = . ;
5254 start_of_data = . ;
5255 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5256 end_of_data = . ;
5257@}
5258@end smallexample
5259
5260Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5261@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5262
252b5132
RH
5263@need 2000
5264@node Operators
5265@subsection Operators
5266@cindex operators for arithmetic
5267@cindex arithmetic operators
5268@cindex precedence in expressions
5269The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5270the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5271@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5272@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5273@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5274@smallexample
5275precedence associativity Operators Notes
5276(highest)
52771 left ! - ~ (1)
52782 left * / %
52793 left + -
52804 left >> <<
52815 left == != > < <= >=
52826 left &
52837 left |
52848 left &&
52859 left ||
528610 right ? :
528711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5288(lowest)
5289@end smallexample
5290Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5291(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5292(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5293@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5294@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5295@tex
5296\vskip \baselineskip
5297%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5298\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5299\hrule
5300\halign
5301{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5302height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5303&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5304height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5305\noalign{\hrule}
5306height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5307&highest&&&&&\cr
5308% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5309&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5310&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5311&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5312&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5313&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5314&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5315&7&&left&&|&\cr
5316&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5317&9&&left&&||&\cr
5318&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5319&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5320&lowest&&&&&\cr
5321height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5322\hrule}
5323@end tex
5324@iftex
5325{
5326@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5327@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5328@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5329}
5330@end iftex
5331@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5332
5333@node Evaluation
5334@subsection Evaluation
5335@cindex lazy evaluation
5336@cindex expression evaluation order
5337The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5338an expression when absolutely necessary.
5339
5340The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5341address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5342regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5343as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5344
5345However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5346until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5347other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5348for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5349
5350The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5351assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5352allocation.
5353
5354Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5355@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5356
5357If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5358available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5359following
5360@smallexample
5361@group
5362SECTIONS
5363 @{
a1ab1d2a 5364 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5365 @{ *(.text) @}
5366 @}
5367@end group
5368@end smallexample
5369@noindent
5370will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5371address}.
5372
5373@node Expression Section
5374@subsection The Section of an Expression
5375@cindex expression sections
5376@cindex absolute expressions
5377@cindex relative expressions
5378@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5379@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5380@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5381When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5382or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5383fixed offset from the base of a section.
5384
5385The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5386whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5387an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5388section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5389
5390A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5391relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5392further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5393section will be the section of the relative expression.
5394
5395A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5396through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5397will not have any particular associated section.
5398
5399You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5400to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5401create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5402section @samp{.data}:
5403@smallexample
5404SECTIONS
5405 @{
5406 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5407 @}
5408@end smallexample
5409@noindent
5410If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5411@samp{.data} section.
5412
5413@node Builtin Functions
5414@subsection Builtin Functions
5415@cindex functions in expressions
5416The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5417use in linker script expressions.
5418
5419@table @code
5420@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5421@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5422@cindex expression, absolute
5423Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5424of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5425value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5426normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5427
5428@item ADDR(@var{section})
5429@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5430@cindex section address in expression
5431Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5432script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5433the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5434identical values:
5435@smallexample
5436@group
5437SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5438 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5439 @{
252b5132
RH
5440 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5441 @dots{}
5442 @}
5443 .output :
5444 @{
5445 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5446 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5447 @}
5448@dots{} @}
5449@end group
5450@end smallexample
5451
876f4090
NS
5452@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5453@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5454@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5455@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5456@cindex round up location counter
5457@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5458@cindex round up expression
5459@cindex align expression
5460Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5461to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5462doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5463arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5464expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5465equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5466
5467Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5468next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5469variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5470input sections:
252b5132
RH
5471@smallexample
5472@group
5473SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5474 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5475 *(.data)
5476 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5477 @}
5478@dots{} @}
5479@end group
5480@end smallexample
5481@noindent
5482The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5483a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5484a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5485of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5486
5487The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5488
362c1d1a
NS
5489@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5490@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5491@cindex section alignment
5492Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5493been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5494evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5495the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5496value in that section.
5497@smallexample
5498@group
5499SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5500 .output @{
5501 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5502 @dots{}
5503 @}
5504@dots{} @}
5505@end group
5506@end smallexample
5507
252b5132
RH
5508@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5509@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5510This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5511scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5512section.
5513
2d20f7bf
JJ
5514@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5515@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5516This is equivalent to either
5517@smallexample
5518(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5519@end smallexample
5520or
5521@smallexample
5522(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5523@end smallexample
5524@noindent
5525depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5526for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5527@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5528If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5529memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5530bytes in the on-disk file.
5531
5532This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5533any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5534@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5535be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5536working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5537
5538@noindent
5539Example:
5540@smallexample
5541 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5542@end smallexample
5543
5544@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5545@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5546This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5547evaluation purposes.
5548
5549@smallexample
5550 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5551@end smallexample
5552
a4f5ad88
JJ
5553@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5554@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5555This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5556@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5557When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5558does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5559@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5560boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5561it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5562@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5563
5564@smallexample
5565 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5566@end smallexample
5567
252b5132
RH
5568@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5569@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5570@cindex symbol defaults
5571Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5572defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5573return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5574default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5575shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5576the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5577existed, its value is preserved:
5578
5579@smallexample
5580@group
5581SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5582 .text : @{
5583 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5584 @dots{}
5585 @}
5586 @dots{}
5587@}
5588@end group
5589@end smallexample
5590
3ec57632
NC
5591@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5592@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5593Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5594
252b5132
RH
5595@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5596@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5597@cindex section load address in expression
5598Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5599the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5600attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5601Section LMA}).
5602
5603@kindex MAX
5604@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5605Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5606
5607@kindex MIN
5608@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5609Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5610
5611@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5612@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5613@cindex unallocated address, next
5614Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5615This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5616use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5617output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5618
3ec57632
NC
5619@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5620@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5621Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5622
ba916c8a
MM
5623@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5624@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5625Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5626value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5627option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5628@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5629be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5630``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5631name.
5632
252b5132
RH
5633@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5634@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5635@cindex section size
5636Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5637been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5638evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5639@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5640@smallexample
5641@group
5642SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5643 .output @{
5644 .start = . ;
5645 @dots{}
5646 .end = . ;
5647 @}
5648 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5649 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5650@dots{} @}
5651@end group
5652@end smallexample
5653
5654@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5655@itemx sizeof_headers
5656@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5657@cindex header size
5658Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5659information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5660this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5661choose, to facilitate paging.
5662
5663@cindex not enough room for program headers
5664@cindex program headers, not enough room
5665When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5666@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5667number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5668addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5669additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5670room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5671the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5672script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5673you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5674command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5675@end table
5676
5677@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5678@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5679@cindex implicit linker scripts
5680If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5681an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5682linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5683linker will report an error.
5684
5685An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5686
5687Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5688assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5689commands.
5690
5691Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5692at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5693read. This can affect archive searching.
5694
5695@ifset GENERIC
5696@node Machine Dependent
5697@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5698
5699@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5700@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5701sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5702functionality are not listed.
5703
5704@menu
36f63dca
NC
5705@ifset H8300
5706* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5707@end ifset
5708@ifset I960
5709* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5710@end ifset
5711@ifset ARM
5712* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5713@end ifset
5714@ifset HPPA
5715* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5716@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5717@ifset M68K
5718* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5719@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5720@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5721* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5722@end ifset
2469cfa2 5723@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5724* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5725@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5726@ifset M68HC11
5727* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5728@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5729@ifset POWERPC
5730* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5731@end ifset
5732@ifset POWERPC64
5733* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5734@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5735@ifset SPU
5736* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5737@end ifset
74459f0e 5738@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5739* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5740@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5741@ifset WIN32
5742* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5743@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5744@ifset XTENSA
5745* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5746@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5747@end menu
5748@end ifset
5749
252b5132
RH
5750@ifset H8300
5751@ifclear GENERIC
5752@raisesections
5753@end ifclear
5754
5755@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5756@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5757
5758@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5759For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5760you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5761
5762@table @emph
5763@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5764@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5765@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5766targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5767program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5768respectively.
5769
5770@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5771@item synthesizing instructions
5772@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5773@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5774sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5775page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5776(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5777@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5778top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5779
5780@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5781@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5782biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5783which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5784page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5785(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5786@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5787the top page of memory).
5788
5789@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5790@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
579132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5792changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5793(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5794@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5795the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5796@end table
5797
5798@ifclear GENERIC
5799@lowersections
5800@end ifclear
5801@end ifset
5802
36f63dca 5803@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5804@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5805@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5806@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5807@node Renesas
5808@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5809
c2dcd04e
NC
5810@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5811H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5812options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5813@end ifset
5814@end ifclear
5815
5816@ifset I960
5817@ifclear GENERIC
5818@raisesections
5819@end ifclear
5820
5821@node i960
5822@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5823
5824@cindex i960 support
5825
5826You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5827specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5828family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5829incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5830linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5831libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5832search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5833
5834For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5835well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5836paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5837the names
5838
5839@smallexample
5840@group
5841try
5842libtry.a
5843tryca
5844libtryca.a
5845@end group
5846@end smallexample
5847
5848@noindent
5849The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5850two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5851
5852You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5853the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5854use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5855specifies a library.
5856
5857@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5858@cindex relaxing on i960
5859@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5860you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5861@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5862them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5863instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5864instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5865target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5866not itself call any subroutines).
5867
48229727
JB
5868@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5869@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5870@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5871The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5872
5873The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5874
36f63dca
NC
5875@ifclear GENERIC
5876@lowersections
5877@end ifclear
5878@end ifset
5879
5880@ifset ARM
5881@ifclear GENERIC
5882@raisesections
5883@end ifclear
5884
93fd0973
SC
5885@ifset M68HC11
5886@ifclear GENERIC
5887@raisesections
5888@end ifclear
5889
5890@node M68HC11/68HC12
5891@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5892
5893@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5894
5895@subsection Linker Relaxation
5896
5897For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5898optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5899
5900@table @emph
5901@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5902@item relaxing address modes
5903@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5904targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5905program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5906respectively.
5907
5908@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5909transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5910page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5911
5912@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5913When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5914of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5915addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5916@code{bset} instructions.
5917
5918@end table
5919
5920@subsection Trampoline Generation
5921
5922@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5923@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5924For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5925call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5926will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5927trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5928case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5929point to the function trampoline.
5930
5931@ifclear GENERIC
5932@lowersections
5933@end ifclear
5934@end ifset
5935
36f63dca 5936@node ARM
3674e28a 5937@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5938
5939@cindex ARM interworking support
5940@kindex --support-old-code
5941For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5942between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5943been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5944line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5945libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5946option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5947given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5948which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5949the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5950non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5951
5952@cindex thumb entry point
5953@cindex entry point, thumb
5954@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5955The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5956@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5957But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5958branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5959executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5960
ce11ba6c
KT
5961@cindex PE import table prefixing
5962@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5963The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5964the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5965elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5966import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5967
e489d0ae
PB
5968@cindex BE8
5969@kindex --be8
5970The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5971executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5972The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5973
3674e28a
PB
5974@cindex TARGET1
5975@kindex --target1-rel
5976@kindex --target1-abs
5977The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5978@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5979or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5980and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5981
5982@cindex TARGET2
5983@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5984The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5985@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5986meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5987@table @samp
5988@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5989@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5990@item abs
5991@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5992@item got-rel
5993@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5994@end table
5995
319850b4
JB
5996@cindex FIX_V4BX
5997@kindex --fix-v4bx
5998The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5999specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6000interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6001also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6002
6003In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6004linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6005@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6006
6007In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6008relocations are ignored.
6009
845b51d6
PB
6010@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6011@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6012Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6013relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6014
6015@smallexample
6016TST rM, #1
6017MOVEQ PC, rM
6018BX Rn
6019@end smallexample
6020
6021This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6022and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6023condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6024
33bfe774
JB
6025@cindex USE_BLX
6026@kindex --use-blx
6027The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6028BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6029situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6030code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6031each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6032
6033This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6034specify it if you are using that target.
6035
c6dd86c6
JB
6036@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6037@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6038The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6039bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6040instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6041to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6042the support code can read the intended values.
6043
6044The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6045intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6046and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6047intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6048full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6049you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6050
6051If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6052enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6053@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6054mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6055vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6056@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6057
6058If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6059potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6060such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6061first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6062instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6063the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6064are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6065
bf21ed78
MS
6066@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6067@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6068The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6069warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6070enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6071linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6072using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6073not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6074
6075@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6076@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6077The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6078warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6079@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6080linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6081using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6082
726150b7
NC
6083@cindex PIC_VENEER
6084@kindex --pic-veneer
6085The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6086ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6087is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6088@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6089
6090@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6091@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6092The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6093code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6094perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6095placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6096controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6097The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6098duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6099group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6100code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6101where they should be placed.
6102
6103The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6104@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6105placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6106branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6107placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6108value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6109exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6110A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6111linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6112from the input sections.
6113
6114The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6115@samp{N = +1}.
6116
1a51c1a4
NC
6117Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6118only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6119otherwise.
6120
36f63dca
NC
6121@ifclear GENERIC
6122@lowersections
6123@end ifclear
6124@end ifset
6125
6126@ifset HPPA
6127@ifclear GENERIC
6128@raisesections
6129@end ifclear
6130
6131@node HPPA ELF32
6132@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6133@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6134@kindex --multi-subspace
6135When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6136import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6137The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6138stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6139multiple sub-spaces.
6140
6141@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6142@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6143Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6144stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6145@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6146sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6147a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6148the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6149conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6150prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6151A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6152branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6153@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6154@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6155detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6156positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6157
6158Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6159single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6160create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6161large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6162
6163@ifclear GENERIC
6164@lowersections
6165@end ifclear
6166@end ifset
6167
7fb9f789
NC
6168@ifset M68K
6169@ifclear GENERIC
6170@raisesections
6171@end ifclear
6172
6173@node M68K
6174@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6175
6176@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6177@kindex --got=@var{type}
6178The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6179The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6180@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6181the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6182@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6183entries only at non-negative offsets.
6184@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6185entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6186support such GOTs.
6187@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6188output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6189file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6190files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6191
6192@ifclear GENERIC
6193@lowersections
6194@end ifclear
6195@end ifset
6196
36f63dca
NC
6197@ifset MMIX
6198@ifclear GENERIC
6199@raisesections
6200@end ifclear
6201
6202@node MMIX
6203@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6204For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6205@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6206understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6207can translate between the two formats.
6208
6209There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6210Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6211registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6212equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6213@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6214global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6215this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6216symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6217
7a2de473
HPN
6218Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6219@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6220The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6221of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6222
6223Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6224are left out from an mmo file.
6225
6226@ifclear GENERIC
6227@lowersections
6228@end ifclear
6229@end ifset
6230
6231@ifset MSP430
6232@ifclear GENERIC
6233@raisesections
6234@end ifclear
6235
6236@node MSP430
6237@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6238For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6239will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6240just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6241
6242@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6243The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6244
6245@table @code
6246@item @samp{.vectors}
6247Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6248
6249@item @samp{.bootloader}
6250Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6251in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6252
6253@item @samp{.infomem}
6254Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6255this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6256
c0065db7 6257@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6258This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6259in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6260
6261@item @samp{.noinit}
6262Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6263
c0065db7 6264The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6265@end table
6266
6267@ifclear GENERIC
6268@lowersections
6269@end ifclear
6270@end ifset
6271
2a60a7a8
AM
6272@ifset POWERPC
6273@ifclear GENERIC
6274@raisesections
6275@end ifclear
6276
6277@node PowerPC ELF32
6278@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6279@cindex PowerPC long branches
6280@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6281Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6282displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6283@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6284@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6285the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6286section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6287section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6288@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6289both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6290considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6291
6292@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6293@table @option
6294@cindex PowerPC PLT
6295@kindex --bss-plt
6296@item --bss-plt
6297Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6298generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6299the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6300writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6301@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6302PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6303compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6304BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6305
016687f8
AM
6306@kindex --secure-plt
6307@item --secure-plt
6308@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6309@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6310when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6311layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6312style BSS PLT.
6313
2a60a7a8
AM
6314@cindex PowerPC GOT
6315@kindex --sdata-got
6316@item --sdata-got
6317The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6318sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6319@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6320section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6321@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6322@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6323@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6324@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6325PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6326pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6327GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6328really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6329
6330@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6331@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6332@item --emit-stub-syms
6333This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6334symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6335
6336@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6337@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6338@item --no-tls-optimize
6339PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6340sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6341disable the optimization.
6342@end table
6343
6344@ifclear GENERIC
6345@lowersections
6346@end ifclear
6347@end ifset
6348
6349@ifset POWERPC64
6350@ifclear GENERIC
6351@raisesections
6352@end ifclear
6353
6354@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6355@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6356
6357@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6358@table @option
6359@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6360@kindex --stub-group-size
6361@item --stub-group-size
6362Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6363by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6364@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6365sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6366a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6367the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6368conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6369prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6370A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6371branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6372@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6373@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6374detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6375positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6376
6377Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6378single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6379create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6380large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6381
6382@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6383@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6384@item --emit-stub-syms
6385This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6386symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6387
6388@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6389@kindex --dotsyms
6390@kindex --no-dotsyms
6391@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6392These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6393in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6394function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6395code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6396properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6397to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6398@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6399dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6400feature.
6401
6402@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6403@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6404@item --no-tls-optimize
6405PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6406sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6407disable the optimization.
6408
6409@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6410@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6411@item --no-opd-optimize
6412PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6413corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6414the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6415Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6416
6417@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6418@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6419@item --non-overlapping-opd
6420Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6421@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6422the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6423entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6424
6425@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6426@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6427@item --no-toc-optimize
6428PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6429entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6430reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6431marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6432marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6433relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6434unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6435reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6436discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6437reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6438code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6439optimization.
6440
6441@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6442@kindex --no-multi-toc
6443@item --no-multi-toc
6444By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6445entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6446total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6447grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6448TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6449calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6450help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
645164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6452Use this option to turn off this feature.
6453@end table
6454
6455@ifclear GENERIC
6456@lowersections
6457@end ifclear
6458@end ifset
6459
49fa1e15
AM
6460@ifset SPU
6461@ifclear GENERIC
6462@raisesections
6463@end ifclear
6464
6465@node SPU ELF
6466@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6467
6468@cindex SPU ELF options
6469@table @option
6470
6471@cindex SPU plugins
6472@kindex --plugin
6473@item --plugin
6474This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6475
6476@cindex SPU overlays
6477@kindex --no-overlays
6478@item --no-overlays
6479Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6480regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6481@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6482turns off all this special overlay handling.
6483
6484@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6485@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6486@item --emit-stub-syms
6487This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6488symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6489
6490@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6491@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6492@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6493This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6494function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6495on calls to non-overlay regions.
6496
6497@cindex SPU local store size
6498@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6499@item --local-store=lo:hi
6500@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6501the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6502range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6503
c0065db7 6504@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6505@kindex --stack-analysis
6506@item --stack-analysis
6507SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6508unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6509under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6510@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6511@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6512determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6513for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6514for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6515for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6516find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6517and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6518under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6519dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6520is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6521and calls will be given.
6522
c0065db7 6523@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6524@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6525@item --emit-stack-syms
6526This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6527in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6528These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6529functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6530functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6531such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6532The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6533@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6534@end table
6535
6536@ifclear GENERIC
6537@lowersections
6538@end ifclear
6539@end ifset
6540
36f63dca
NC
6541@ifset TICOFF
6542@ifclear GENERIC
6543@raisesections
6544@end ifclear
6545
6546@node TI COFF
6547@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6548@cindex TI COFF versions
6549@kindex --format=@var{version}
6550The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6551TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6552also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6553format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6554header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6555
6556@ifclear GENERIC
6557@lowersections
6558@end ifclear
6559@end ifset
6560
2ca22b03
NC
6561@ifset WIN32
6562@ifclear GENERIC
6563@raisesections
6564@end ifclear
6565
6566@node WIN32
6567@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6568
c0065db7 6569This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6570See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6571command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6572
6573@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6574@cindex import libraries
6575@item import libraries
69da35b5 6576The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6577libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6578regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6579archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6580support for creating such libraries provided with the
6581@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6582
c0065db7
RM
6583@item exporting DLL symbols
6584@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6585The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6586
6587@table @emph
6588@item using auto-export functionality
6589@cindex using auto-export functionality
6590By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6591which is controlled by the following command line options:
6592
0a5d968e
NC
6593@itemize
6594@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6595@item --exclude-symbols
6596@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6597@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6598@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6599@end itemize
6600
09e2aba4
DK
6601When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6602(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6603symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6604often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6605private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6606options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6607exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6608final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6609
6610If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6611command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6612if either of the following are true:
6613
6614@itemize
6615@item A DEF file is used.
6616@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6617@end itemize
dc8465bf 6618
c0065db7
RM
6619@item using a DEF file
6620@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6621Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6622an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6623exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6624name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6625command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6626
6627@example
6628gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6629@end example
6630
0a5d968e
NC
6631Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6632@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6633
dc8465bf
NC
6634Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6635
6636@example
4b5bd4e7 6637LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6638
6639EXPORTS
6640foo
6641bar
6642_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6643another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6644var1 DATA
c0065db7 6645@end example
dc8465bf 6646
4b5bd4e7
DS
6647This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6648symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6649alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6650by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6651@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6652@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6653
6b31ad16
DS
6654The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6655name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6656the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6657
b45619c0
NC
6658When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6659library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6660@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6661executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6662
6663With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6664specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6665non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6666
6667If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6668or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6669filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6670
4b5bd4e7
DS
6671The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6672
6673@example
6674EXPORTS
6675 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6676 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6677 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6678@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6679
6680Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6681@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6682@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6683@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6684Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6685@samp{<integer>} alias.
6686
6687The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6688
6689@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6690will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6691by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6692linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6693library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6694
6695@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6696The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6697the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6698@code{*_imp__foo}).
6699
6700@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6701well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6702read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6703variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6704the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6705extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6706application will behave unexpectedly.
6707
6708@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6709it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6710symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6711API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6712the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6713
4b5bd4e7
DS
6714See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6715other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6716
6717@cindex creating a DEF file
6718While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6719with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6720
6721@item Using decorations
6722@cindex Using decorations
6723Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6724itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6725declared as:
6726
6727@example
6728__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6729__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6730@end example
6731
6732All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6733any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6734this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6735the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6736
6737Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6738decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6739instead:
6740
6741@example
6742__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6743__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6744@end example
6745
c0065db7
RM
6746This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6747when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6748variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6749code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6750of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6751omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6752@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6753information.
c0065db7 6754@end table
dc8465bf 6755
2ca22b03
NC
6756@cindex automatic data imports
6757@item automatic data imports
6758The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6759by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6760compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6761issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6762code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6763c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6764initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6765decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6766platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6767command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6768The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6769suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6770trigger the feature's use.
6771
c0065db7 6772auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6773additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6774
c0065db7 6775"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6776documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6777
c0065db7
RM
6778The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6779occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6780One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6781below.
6782
6783@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6784For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6785object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6786offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6787field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6788in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6789without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6790The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6791references.
6792
c0065db7
RM
6793The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6794be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6795themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6796runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6797compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6798support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6799run without error on an older system.
6800
c0065db7
RM
6801@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6802enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6803
6804@cindex direct linking to a dll
6805@item direct linking to a dll
6806The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6807including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6808libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6809traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6810libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6811function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6812though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6813storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6814tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6815large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6816
c0065db7 6817Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6818@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6819of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6820perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6821select the dll instead of an import library.
6822
2ca22b03 6823
69da35b5
NC
6824For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6825to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6826
6827@example
45e948fe
NC
6828libxxx.dll.a
6829xxx.dll.a
6830libxxx.a
6831xxx.lib
69da35b5 6832cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6833libxxx.dll
6834xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6835@end example
6836
69da35b5
NC
6837before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6838
c0065db7
RM
6839(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6840where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6841@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6842file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6843@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6844
c0065db7
RM
6845Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6846@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6847was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6848various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6849could coexist on the same machine.
6850
2ca22b03
NC
6851The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6852applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6853libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6854
6855@example
6856bin/
6857 cygxxx.dll
6858lib/
6859 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6860 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6861@end example
6862
c0065db7
RM
6863Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6864done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6865
68661. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6867@example
6868gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6869@end example
2ca22b03 6870
69da35b5
NC
6871However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6872(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6873@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6874not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6875
2ca22b03
NC
68762. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6877directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6878should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6879making the app/dll.
6880
6881@example
6882ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6883@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6884
6885Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6886
6887@example
6888gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6889@end example
69da35b5
NC
6890
6891This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6892perfectly legal
6893
6894@example
6895bin/
6896 cygxxx-5.dll
6897lib/
c0065db7 6898 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6899@end example
6900
dc8465bf 6901Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6902even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6903@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6904
6905Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6906wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6907
69081. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6909work with auto-imported data.
6910
dc8465bf
NC
69112. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6912import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6913symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6914for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6915possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6916
45e948fe
NC
69173. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6918critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6919in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6920stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6921
69da35b5 6922So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6923true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6924a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6925binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6926massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6927requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6928will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6929
c0065db7 6930@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6931@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6932@item adding additional names
6933Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6934A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6935exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6936when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6937import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6938
c0065db7 6939@example
dc8465bf
NC
6940LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6941
6942EXPORTS
c0065db7 6943foo
dc8465bf 6944_foo = foo
c0065db7 6945@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6946
6947The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6948
6949Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6950source code using the "weak" attribute:
6951
c0065db7
RM
6952@example
6953void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6954void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6955@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6956
6957See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6958symbols.
6959
6960@item renaming symbols
6961Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6962kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6963@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6964DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6965created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6966
c0065db7 6967@example
dc8465bf
NC
6968LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6969
6970EXPORTS
6971_foo = foo
c0065db7 6972@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6973
6974The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6975@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6976@end table
dc8465bf 6977
0a5d968e 6978Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6979unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6980If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6981@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6982that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6983@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6984renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6985to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6986the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6987In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6988which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6989
6990@cindex weak externals
6991@item weak externals
6992The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6993weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6994defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6995are three variants of weak externals:
6996@itemize
6997@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6998called lazy externals.
6999@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7000This form is not presently implemented.
7001@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7002implemented.
7003@end itemize
7004As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7005are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7006uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7007
7008@cindex aligned common symbols
7009@item aligned common symbols
7010As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7011desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7012the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7013carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7014by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7015tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7016but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7017warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7018@end table
7019
7020@ifclear GENERIC
7021@lowersections
7022@end ifclear
7023@end ifset
7024
e0001a05
NC
7025@ifset XTENSA
7026@ifclear GENERIC
7027@raisesections
7028@end ifclear
7029
7030@node Xtensa
7031@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7032
7033@cindex Xtensa processors
7034The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7035@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7036specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7037keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7038example, with the command:
7039
7040@smallexample
7041SECTIONS
7042@{
7043 .text : @{
7044 *(.literal .text)
7045 @}
7046@}
7047@end smallexample
7048
7049@noindent
7050@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7051and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7052literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7053interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7054group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7055files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7056and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7057
43cd72b9 7058@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7059@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7060Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7061provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7062is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7063literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7064will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7065location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7066the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7067unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7068@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7069range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7070
7071For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7072to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7073instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7074instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7075instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7076@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7077hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7078By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7079switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7080density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7081instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7082performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7083linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7084a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7085
7086The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7087control the linker:
7088
7089@cindex Xtensa options
7090@table @option
e0001a05 7091@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
7092@item --no-relax
7093Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7094by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7095relaxation.
7096
7097@item --size-opt
7098When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7099more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7100no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7101alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7102preserve the correctness of the code.
7103@end table
e0001a05
NC
7104
7105@ifclear GENERIC
7106@lowersections
7107@end ifclear
7108@end ifset
7109
252b5132
RH
7110@ifclear SingleFormat
7111@node BFD
7112@chapter BFD
7113
7114@cindex back end
7115@cindex object file management
7116@cindex object formats available
7117@kindex objdump -i
7118The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7119These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7120object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7121format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7122it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7123associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7124object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7125(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7126list all the formats available for your configuration.
7127
7128@cindex BFD requirements
7129@cindex requirements for BFD
7130As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7131several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7132BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7133formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7134been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7135BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7136may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7137
7138One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7139mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7140useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7141conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7142
7143@menu
7144* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7145@end menu
7146
7147@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7148@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7149@cindex opening object files
7150@include bfdsumm.texi
7151@end ifclear
7152
7153@node Reporting Bugs
7154@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7155@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7156@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7157
ff5dcc92 7158Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7159
7160Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7161it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7162to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7163work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7164@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7165
7166In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7167information that enables us to fix the bug.
7168
7169@menu
7170* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7171* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7172@end menu
7173
7174@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7175@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7176@cindex bug criteria
7177
7178If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7179
7180@itemize @bullet
7181@cindex fatal signal
7182@cindex linker crash
7183@cindex crash of linker
7184@item
7185If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7186@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7187
7188@cindex error on valid input
7189@item
ff5dcc92 7190If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7191
7192@cindex invalid input
7193@item
ff5dcc92 7194If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7195may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7196object files are correct.
7197
7198@item
7199If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7200improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7201@end itemize
7202
7203@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7204@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7205@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7206@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7207
7208A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7209products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7210recommend you contact that organization first.
7211
7212You can find contact information for many support companies and
7213individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7214distribution.
7215
ad22bfe8 7216@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7217Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7218@value{BUGURL}.
7219@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7220
7221The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7222@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7223fact or leave it out, state it!
7224
7225Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7226problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7227assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7228matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7229the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7230location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7231were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7232into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7233specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7234and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7235
7236Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7237the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7238on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7239
7240Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7241bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7242respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7243You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7244
7245To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7246
7247@itemize @bullet
7248@item
ff5dcc92 7249The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7250the @samp{--version} argument.
7251
7252Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7253the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7254
7255@item
ff5dcc92 7256Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7257patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7258
7259@item
7260The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7261version number.
7262
7263@item
ff5dcc92 7264What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7265``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7266
7267@item
7268The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7269observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7270list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7271sufficient.
7272
7273If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7274and then we might not encounter the bug.
7275
7276@item
7277A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7278bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7279provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7280bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7281state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7282requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7283we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7284attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7285
7286If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7287@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7288object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7289@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7290how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7291
7292@item
7293A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7294incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7295
ff5dcc92 7296Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7297will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7298not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7299a chance to make a mistake.
7300
7301Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7302say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7303copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7304C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7305and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7306fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7307you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7308any conclusion from our observations.
7309
7310@item
ff5dcc92 7311If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7312diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7313@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7314If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7315context, not by line number.
7316
7317The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7318sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7319@end itemize
7320
7321Here are some things that are not necessary:
7322
7323@itemize @bullet
7324@item
7325A description of the envelope of the bug.
7326
7327Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7328which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7329changes will not affect it.
7330
7331This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7332will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7333with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7334We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7335
7336Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7337of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7338output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7339less time, and so on.
7340
7341However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7342report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7343
7344@item
7345A patch for the bug.
7346
7347A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7348the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7349a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7350to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7351
ff5dcc92 7352Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7353construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7354through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7355able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7356fixed.
7357
7358And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7359patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7360help us to understand.
7361
7362@item
7363A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7364
7365Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7366things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7367@end itemize
7368
7369@node MRI
7370@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7371@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7372To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7373linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7374alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7375described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7376simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7377@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7378linker commands; these commands are described here.
7379
7380In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7381file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7382features to make use of them.
7383
7384You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7385@samp{-c} command-line option.
7386
7387Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7388command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7389blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7390MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7391issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7392
7393Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7394
7395You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7396lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7397The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7398
7399@table @code
7400@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7401@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7402@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7403Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7404the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7405@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7406your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7407script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7408commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7409input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7410@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7411
7412@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7413@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7414Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7415in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7416
7417@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7418
7419@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7420@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7421Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7422@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7423
7424@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7425@item BASE @var{expression}
7426Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7427absolute addresses) in the output file.
7428
7429@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7430@item CHIP @var{expression}
7431@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7432This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7433
7434@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7435@item END
7436This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7437
7438@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7439@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7440Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7441language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7442
7443@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7444@item
252b5132
RH
7445S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7446
7447@item
7448IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7449
7450@item
7451COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7452@samp{COFF}
7453@end enumerate
7454
7455@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7456@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7457Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7458@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7459
7460The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7461same line, with no change in its effect.
7462
7463@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7464@item LOAD @var{filename}
7465@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7466Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7467same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7468command line.
7469
7470@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7471@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7472@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7473MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7474option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7475
7476@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7477@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7478@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7479Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7480order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7481script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7482sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7483file, in the order specified.
7484
7485@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7486@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7487@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7488@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7489Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7490@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7491
7492@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7493@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7494@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7495@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7496You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7497specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7498If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7499@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7500@end table
7501
793c5807
NC
7502@node GNU Free Documentation License
7503@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7504@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7505
370b66a1
CD
7506@node LD Index
7507@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7508
7509@printindex cp
7510
7511@tex
7512% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7513% meantime:
7514\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7515\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7516\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7517\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7518\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7519\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7520\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7521\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7522\page\colophon
7523% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7524@end tex
7525
252b5132 7526@bye
This page took 1.261426 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.